DL05 Micro PLC User Manual Volume 1 of 2. Manual Number: D0-USER-M

Transcription

1 L Micro PL User Manual Volume of Manual Number: -USER-M

2 Notes

3 WRNING Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from utomationdirect.com, doing business as utomationirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. nyone who installs or uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or operating the equipment. To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to verify that the equipment, installation, and operation is in compliance with the latest revision of these codes. t a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire ode, National Electrical ode, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer's ssociation (NEM). There may be local regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for safe installation and operation. Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or operation. Our products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage ("High Risk ctivities"). utomationirect specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk ctivities. For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and onditions section of our catalog. If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need additional information, please call us at --. This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. t utomationirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation. This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product. Trademarks This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners. utomationirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others. opyright, utomationdirect.com Incorporated ll Rights Reserved No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written consent of utomationdirect.com Incorporated. utomationirect retains the exclusive rights to all information included in this document.

4 VERTISSEM Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté l'équipement d'automatisation de utomationdirect.com M,, en faisant des affaires comme, utomationirect. Nous tenons à ce que votre nouvel équipement d'automatisation fonctionne en toute sécurité. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet équipement doit lire la présente publication (et toutes les autres publications pertinentes) avant de l'installer ou de l'utiliser. fin de réduire au minimum le risque d'éventuels problèmes de sécurité, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux et nationaux applicables régissant l'installation et le fonctionnement de votre équipement. es codes diffèrent d'une région à l'autre et, habituellement, évoluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de déterminer les codes à respecter et de vous assurer que l'équipement, l'installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la plus récente de ces codes. Vous devez, à tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du ode national de prévention des incendies, du ode national de l'électricité et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer's ssociation (NEM). es organismes de réglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent également vous aider à déterminer les codes ainsi que les normes à respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement sûrs. L'omission de respecter la totalité des codes et des normes applicables peut entraîner des dommages à l'équipement ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits décrits dans cette publication conviennent à votre application particulière et nous n'assumons aucune responsabilité à l'égard de la conception, de l'installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit. Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux défaillances et ne sont ni conçus ni fabriqués pour l'utilisation ou la revente en tant qu'équipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux nécessitant une sécurité absolue, par exemple, l'exploitation d'installations nucléaires, les systèmes de navigation aérienne ou de communication, le contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les équipements de survie ou les systèmes d'armes, pour lesquels la défaillance du produit peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matériels ou environnementaux («activités à risque élevé»). La société utomationirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d'aptitude à l'emploi en ce qui a trait aux activités à risque élevé. Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la sécurité, veuillez consulter la section Modalités et conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l'installation ou du fonctionnement de cet équipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplémentaires, n'hésitez pas à nous téléphoner au --. ette publication s'appuie sur l'information qui était disponible au moment de l'impression. À la société utomationirect, nous nous efforçons constamment d'améliorer nos produits et services. 'est pourquoi nous nous réservons le droit d'apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans préavis ni quelque obligation que ce soit. La présente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractéristiques susceptibles de ne pas être offertes dans certaines versions révisées du produit. Marques de commerce La présente publication peut contenir des références à des produits fabriqués ou offerts par d'autres entreprises. Les désignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent être des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement à leurs propriétaires respectifs. utomationirect nie tout intérêt dans les autres marques et désignations. opyright, utomationdirect.com Incorporated Tous droits réservés Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit être copiée, reproduite ou transmise de quelque façon que ce soit sans le consentement préalable écrit de la société utomationdirect.com Incorporated. utomationirect conserve les droits exclusifs à l'égard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le présent document.

5 L MIRO PL USER MNUL Please include the Manual Number and the Manual Issue, both shown below, when communicating with Technical Support regarding this publication. Manual Number: -USER-M Issue: Sixth Edition, Rev. Issue ate: / Publication History Issue ate escription of hanges Original / Original issue nd Edition / added PI chapter,analog module chapter and memory cartridge chapter nd Edition, Rev. / added power rd Edition / removed M and analog module chapters, corrected drum instruction, several minor corrections, added PL weights, EU directive additions rd Edition, Rev. / dded new discrete option modules th Edition / onverted manual to QuarkXPress th Edition / Removed option module data, added M chapter, updated instruction set, inserted memory appendix, made minor corrections th Edition / orrected E-stop, updated instruction set, added irectsoft Iox instructions to hapter, revised PI chapter, moved HSIO chapter to ppendices, divided hapter into hapters &, added Numbering Systems to ppendix section, made corrections throughout manual th Edition, Rev. / Made minor corrections throughout manual.

6 Notes

7 VOLUME ONE: TLE OF ONTS hapter : Getting Started Introduction The Purpose of this Manual Where to egin Supplemental Manuals Technical Support onventions Key Topics for Each hapter L Micro PL omponents The L Micro PL Family irectsoft Programming for Windows Handheld Programmer I/O Selection Quick hart Quick Start for PL heckout and Programming Steps to esigning a Successful System Questions and nswers about L Micro PLs hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Safety Guidelines Plan for Safety Three Levels of Protection Emergency Stops Emergency Power isconnect Orderly System Shutdown lass, ivision pproval Orientation to L Front Panel onnector Removal

8 Table of ontents Mounting Guidelines Unit imensions Enclosures Panel Layout & learances Using IN Rail Mounting Rails Environmental Specifications gency pprovals Marine Use Wiring Guidelines Fuse Protection for Input Power External Power Source Planning the Wiring Routes Fuse Protection for Input and Output ircuits I/O Point Numbering System Wiring Strategies PL Isolation oundaries onnecting Operator Interface evices onnecting Programming evices Sinking/Sourcing oncepts I/O ommon Terminal oncepts onnecting I/O to Solid State Field evices Solid State Input Sensors Solid State Output Loads Relay Output Wiring Methods Surge Suppression For Inductive Loads Prolonging Relay ontact Life Input Wiring Methods Output Wiring Methods High Speed I/O Wiring Methods Wiring iagrams and Specifications R I/O Wiring iagram R I/O Wiring iagram I/O Wiring iagram I/O Wiring iagram I/O Wiring iagram ii L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

9 Table of ontents I/O Wiring iagram R- I/O Wiring iagram I/O Wiring iagram Glossary of Specification Terms hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Introduction L PU Features PU Specifications PU Hardware Setup ommunication Port Pinout iagrams onnecting the Programming evices PU Setup Information Status Indicators Mode Switch Functions hanging Modes in the L PL Mode of Operation at Power-up uxiliary Functions learing an Existing Program Initializing System Memory Setting Retentive Memory Ranges Using a Password PU Operation PU Operating System Program Mode Run Mode Read Inputs Service Peripherals and Force I/O Update Special Relays and Special Registers Solve pplication Program Write Outputs iagnostics I/O Response Time Is Timing Important for Your pplication? Normal Minimum I/O Response L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. iii

10 Table of ontents iv Normal Maximum I/O Response Improving Response Time PU Scan Time onsiderations Reading Inputs Writing Outputs pplication Program Execution PL Numbering Systems PL Resources V memory inary-oded ecimal Numbers Hexadecimal Numbers Memory Map Octal Numbering System iscrete and Word Locations V-memory Locations for iscrete Memory reas Input Points (X ata Type) Output Points (Y ata Type) ontrol Relays ( ata Type) Timers and Timer Status its (T ata Type) Timer urrent Values (V ata Type) ounters and ounter Status its (T ata type) ounter urrent Values (V ata Type) Word Memory (V ata Type) Stages (S ata type) Special Relays (SP ata Type) L System V-memory System Parameters and efault ata Locations (V ata Type) L Memory Map Table L liases X Input it Map Y Output it Map ontrol Relay it Map Stage ontrol/status it Map Timer Status it Map ounter Status it Map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

11 Table of ontents hapter : onfiguration and onnections L System esign Strategies I/O System onfigurations Networking onfigurations utomatic I/O onfiguration Power udgeting Network onfiguration and onnections onfiguring the L s omm Ports L Port Specifications Networking L to L RS Networking P to Ls RS and to Other PLs Modbus Port onfiguration irectnet Port onfiguration Network Slave Operation Modbus Function odes Supported etermining the Modbus ddress If Your Host Software Requires the ata Type and ddress Example : V Example : Y Example : T urrent Value Example : If Your Modbus Host Software Requires an ddress ONLY Example : V / Mode Example : Y / Mode Example : T urrent Value Mode Example : / Mode Network Master Operation Step : Identify Master Port # and Slave # Step : Load Number of ytes to Transfer Step : Specify Master Memory rea Step : Specify Slave Memory rea ommunications from a Ladder Program Multiple Read and Write Interlocks L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. v

12 Table of ontents hapter : Standard RLL and Intelligent ox (Iox) Instructions Introduction Instruction List Using oolean Instructions EN Statement Simple Rungs Normally losed ontact ontacts in Series Midline Outputs Parallel Elements Joining Series ranches in Parallel Joining Parallel ranches in Series ombination Networks omparative oolean oolean Stack Immediate oolean oolean Instructions omparative oolean Immediate Instructions Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions Using Timers Timer Example Using iscrete Status its Timer Example Using omparative ontacts ccumulating Fast Timer (TMRF) ccumulating Timer Example using iscrete Status its ccumulator Timer Example Using omparative ontacts Using ounters ounter Example Using iscrete Status its ounter Example Using omparative ontacts Stage ounter Example Using iscrete Status its Stage ounter Example Using omparative ontacts Up / own ounter Example Using iscrete Status its Up / own ounter Example Using omparative ontacts ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions vi L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

13 Table of ontents Using the ccumulator opying ata to the ccumulator hanging the ccumulator ata Using the ccumulator Stack Using Pointers Logical Instructions (ccumulator) Math Instructions it Operation Instructions Number onversion Instructions (ccumulator) Shuffle igits lock iagram Table Instructions opy ata From a ata Label rea to V-memory PU ontrol Instructions Program ontrol Instructions Understanding Master ontrol Relays MLS/MLR Example Interrupt Instructions External Interrupt Program Example Timed Interrupt Program Example Independent Timed Interrupt Message Instructions Fault Example ata Label Example Intelligent I/O Instructions Network Instructions Intelligent ox (Iox) Instructions (Iox) Instructions List L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. vii

14 GETTING STRTE HPTER HPTER In This hapter: Introduction onventions L Micro PL omponents Programming Methods I/O Selection Quick hart Quick Start for PL heckout and Programming Steps to esigning a Successful System Questions and nswers about L Micro PLs

15 hapter : Getting Started Introduction The Purpose of this Manual Thank you for purchasing a L Micro PL. This manual shows you how to install, program, and maintain all the Micro PLs in the L family. It also helps you understand how to interface them to other devices in a control system. This manual contains important information for personnel who will install L PLs, and for the PL programmer. If you understand PL systems our manuals will provide all the information you need to get and keep your system up and running. Where to egin If you already understand the L Micro PL please read hapter, Installation, Wiring, and Specifications, and proceed on to other chapters as needed. e sure to keep this manual handy for reference when you run into questions. If you are a new L customer, we suggest you read this manual completely so you can understand the wide variety of features in the L family of products. We believe you will be pleasantly surprised with how much you can accomplish with utomationirect products. Supplemental Manuals The OPTIONS M manual will be most helpful to select and use any of the optional modules that are available for the L PL which includes the analog I/O modules. If you have purchased operator interfaces or irectsoft programming software you will need to supplement this manual with the manuals that are written for these products. Technical Support We realize that even though we strive to be the best, we may have arranged our information in such a way you cannot find what you are looking for. First, check these resources for help in locating the information: Table of ontents chapter and section listing of contents, in the front of this manual ppendices reference material for key topics, near the end of this manual You can also check our online resources for the latest product support information: Internet the address of our website is: If you still need assistance, please call us at. Our technical support team will be available to work with you in answering your questions. They are available Monday through Friday from :.M. to : P.M. Eastern Standard Time. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

16 hapter : Getting Started onventions When you see the notepad icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will be a special note. Notes represent information that may make your work quicker or more efficient. The word NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text. When you see the exclamation point icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of property, or even death in extreme cases. ny warning in this manual should be regarded as critical information that should be read in its entirety. The word WRNING in boldface will mark the beginning of the text. Key Topics for Each hapter The beginning of each chapter will list the key topics that can be found in that chapter. Getting Started In This hapter... HPTER General Information...- Specifications...- L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

17 hapter : Getting Started L Micro PL omponents The L Micro PL family is a versatile product line that provides a wide variety of features in a very compact footprint. The PLs are small, yet offer many features usually found only in larger, more expensive systems. These include a removable connector, and two RS- communication ports. The L Micro PL Family The L Micro PL family includes eight different versions. ll have the same appearance and PU performance. The PU offers the same instruction set as our popular L PU, plus several more instructions specifically designed for machine control applications. ll L PLs have two RS communications ports. Units with inputs have selectable high-speed input features on three input points. Units with outputs offer selectable pulse output capability on the first and second output points. ll L Micro PLs offer a large amount of program memory, a substantial instruction set and advanced diagnostics. etails of these features and more are covered in hapter, PU Specifications and Operation. The eight types of L Micro PLs provide a variety of Input/Output choices, listed in the following table. L Micro PL Family L Part Number iscrete Input Type iscrete Output Type External Power High-Speed Input Pulse Output R Relay V No No R Relay V Yes No V No Yes V Yes Yes V No No V Yes No R Relay V Yes No V Yes Yes irectsoft Programming for Windows The L Micro PL can be programmed with one of the most advanced programming packages in the industry irectsoft, a Windows-based software package that supports familiar features such as cut-and-paste between applications, point-and-click editing, viewing and editing multiple application programs at the same time, etc. PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

18 hapter : Getting Started irectsoft universally supports the irectlogi PU families. This means you can use the full version of irectsoft to program L, L, L, L, L, L PUs. The irectsoft Programming Software User Manual discusses the programming language in depth. irectsoft version. or later is needed to program the L. Handheld Programmer ll L Micro PLs have built-in programming ports for use with the handheld programmer ( HPP), the same programmer used with the L, L and L families. The handheld programmer can be used to create, modify and debug your application program. separate manual discusses the Handheld Programmer. Only HPPs with firmware version. or later will program the L. NOTE: Not all program instructions are available to use with the HHP, such as the RUM instruction. Use irectsoft for these instructions. I/O Selection Quick hart The eight versions of the L have Input/Output circuits which can interface to a wide variety of field devices. In several instances a particular Input or Output circuit can interface to either or voltages, or both sinking and sourcing circuit arrangements. heck this chart carefully to find the proper L Micro PL to interface to the field devices in your application. L Part Number I/O type/ commons INPUTS Sink/Source I/O Selection hart Voltage Ranges I/O type/ commons Sink/Source * See hapter Specifications for your particular L version. PUTS Voltage/ urrent Ratings R / V Relay / Sink or Source V, * V, * R / Sink or Source V Relay / Sink or Source V, * V, * / V / Sink V,. (Y Y) V,. (Y Y) / Sink or Source V / Sink V,. (Y Y) V,. (Y Y) / V / V, Hz,.* / Sink or Source V / V, Hz,. * R / Sink or Source V Relay / Sink or Source V, V, * / Sink or Source V / Sink V,. (Y Y) V,. (Y Y) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

19 hapter : Getting Started Quick Start for PL heckout and Programming This example is not intended to tell you everything you need to start-up your system, warnings and helpful tips are in the rest of the manual. It is only intended to give you a general picture of what you will need to do to get your system powered-up. Step : Unpack the L Equipment Unpack the L and gather the parts necessary to build this demonstration system. The recommended components are: L Micro PL power cord or power supply Toggle switches or simulator module, F-SIM(see Step on next page). Hook-up wire, - WG L User Manual (this manual) small screwdriver, / flat or # Philips type You will need at least one of the following programming options: irectsoft Programming Software, irectsoft Manual, and a programming cable (connects the L to a personal computer), or -HPP Handheld Programmer (comes with programming cable), and the Handheld Programmer Manual PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

20 hapter : Getting Started Step : onnect Switches to Input Terminals To finish this quick-start exercise or study other examples in this manual, you ll need to either connect some input switches as shown below or install the F-SIM, simulator module, which needs no wiring, into the option slot. If you have inputs you will need to use the F PS (V) or another external -V power supply. e sure to follow the instructions in the accompanying WRNING note. V Power Supply R,, ( input versions, V only) X - X: Input + Y - Y: Output -OR, -, - -R-, -- ( input versions, -V) X - X: Input Y - Y: Output Toggle Switches, UL Listed WRNING: O NOT wire the toggle switches as shown to V-powered units. The discrete inputs will only accept V nominal. lso, remove power and unplug the L when wiring the switches. Only use UL-approved switches rated for at least V, for inputs. Firmly mount the switches before using. Toggle Switches, UL Listed L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

21 hapter : Getting Started Step : onnect the Power Wiring onnect the power input wiring for the L. Observe all precautions stated earlier in this manual. For more details on wiring, see hapter on Installation, Wiring, and Specifications. When the wiring is complete, close the connector covers. o not apply power at this time. / V Power Input LGN - V X - X: Input Y - Y: Output Step : onnect the Programming evice Most programmers will use irectsoft programming software, installed on a personal computer. Or, you may need the portability of the Handheld Programmer. oth devices will connect to OM port of the L via the appropriate cable. Use cable part # SL (cable comes with HPP) For replacement cable, use part # V L / V Power Input - V W max G X - X: Input Y - Y: Output L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

22 hapter : Getting Started Step : Switch on the System Power pply power to the system and ensure the PWR indicator on the L is on. If not, remove power from the system and check all wiring and refer to the troubleshooting section in hapter for assistance. Step : Initialize Scratchpad Memory It s a good precaution to always clear the system memory (scratchpad memory) on a new L. There are two ways to clear the system memory: In irectsoft, select the PL menu, then Setup, then Initialize Scratchpad. For additional information, see the irectsoft Manual. For the Handheld Programmer, use the UX key and execute UX. See the Handheld Programmer Manual for additional information. Step : Enter a Ladder Program t this point, irectsoft programmers need to refer to the Quick Start Tutorial in the irectsoft Manual. There you will learn how to establish a communications link with the L PL, change PU modes to Run or Program, and enter a program. If you are learning how to program with the Handheld Programmer, make sure the PU is in Program Mode (the RUN LE on the front of the L should be off). If the RUN LE is on, use the MOE key on the Handheld Programmer to put the PL in Program Mode. Enter the following keystrokes on the Handheld Programmer. Equivalent irectsoft display X Y EN LR NEXT GX LR E $ STR E fter entering the simple example program put the PL in Run mode by using the Mode key on the Handheld Programmer. The RUN indicator on the PL will illuminate indicating the PU has entered the Run mode. If not, repeat this step, ensuring the program is entered properly or refer to the troubleshooting guide in chapter. fter the PU enters the run mode, the output status indicator for Y should follow the switch status on input channel X. When the switch is on, the output will be on. UX N TMR LR lear the Program Move to the first address and enter X contact Enter output Y Enter the EN statement L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

23 hapter : Getting Started Steps to esigning a Successful System Step : Review the Installation Guidelines lways make safety the first priority in any system design. hapter provides several guidelines that will help you design a safer, more reliable system. This chapter also includes wiring guidelines for the various versions of the L PL. Step : Understand the PL Setup Procedures The PL is the heart of your automation system. Make sure you take time to understand the various features and setup requirements. Step : Review the I/O Selection riteria There are many considerations involved when you select your I/O type and field devices. Take time to understand how the various types of sensors and loads can affect your choice of I/O type. Step : hoose a System Wiring Strategy It is important to understand the various system design options that are available before wiring field devices and field-side power supplies to the Micro PL. Step : Understand the System Operation efore you begin to enter a program, it is very helpful to understand how the L system processes information. This involves not only program execution steps, but also involves the various modes of operation and memory layout characteristics. + V + + L PL Input ommon Power Power Input Power Up Initialize Hardware PL PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX Input Sensing Loads Outputs ommons Inputs ommons L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

24 hapter : Getting Started Step : Review the Programming oncepts The L PL instruction set provides for three main approaches to solving the application program, depicted in the figure below. RLL diagram-style programming is the best tool for solving boolean logic and general PU register/accumulator manipulation. It includes dozens of instructions, which will also be needed to augment drums and stages. The Timer/Event rum Sequencer features up to steps and offers both time and/or event-based step transitions. The RUM instruction is best for a repetitive process based on a single series of steps. Stage programming (also called RLL PLUS ) is based on state-transition diagrams. Stages divide the ladder program into sections which correspond to the states in a flow chart you draw for your process. Standard RLL Programming (see hapter ) X SP L V MP K Y Timer/Event rum Sequencer (see hapter ) fter reviewing the programming concepts above, you ll be equipped with a variety of tools to write your application program. Step : hoose the Instructions Once you have installed the Micro PL and understand the main programming concepts, you can begin writing your application program. t that time you will begin to use one of the most powerful instruction sets available in a small PL. Step : Understand the Maintenance and Troubleshooting Procedures Sometimes equipment failures occur when we least expect it. Switches fail, loads short and need to be replaced, etc. In most cases, the majority of the troubleshooting and maintenance time is spent trying to locate the problem. The L Micro PL has many built-in features such as error codes that can help you quickly identify problems. OWN TMR K T Stage Programming (see hapter ) Push UP LOWER LIGHT RISE Push OWN NT T K PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX UP L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

25 hapter : Getting Started Questions and nswers about L Micro PLs Q. What is the instruction set like?. The instruction set is very close to our popular L PU. However, there are significant additions, such as the drum instruction, networking, PI control and High- Speed I/O capabilities. Q. o I have to buy the full irectsoft programming package to program the L?. No, irectsoft programming software is available for programming irectlogi PLs for no additional charge; however, it will only allow maximum words to be programmed. Go to utomationirect.com for more information. Q. Is the L expandable?. No, the L series are stand-alone PLs with one slot for the installation of an available option module. They do not have expansion bases, such as our L system which has expansion bases, yet are very compact and affordable. Q. oes the L have motion control capability?. Yes. The units with I/O have selectable high-speed input features on three inputs. There is also an optional High-Speed ounter I/O module available with special utility software. Either can accept pulse-type input signals for high-speed counting or timing applications and provide high-speed pulse-type output signals for stepper/servo motor control, monitoring, alarm or other discrete control functions. Three types of motion profiles are available, which are explained in hapter. Q. re the ladder programs stored in a removable EEPROM?. The L contains a non-removable FLSH memory for program storage, which may be written and erased thousands of times. You may transfer programs to/from the L using irectsoft on a P, or the HPP (which does support a removable EEPROM). There is an optional MOS RM memory cartridge (M) available (See hapter ). Q. oes the L contain fuses for its outputs?. There are no output circuit fuses. Therefore, we recommend fusing each channel, or fusing each common. See hapter for I/O wiring guidelines. Q. Is the L Micro PL U.L. approved?. The Micro PL has met the requirements of UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.), and UL (anadian Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.). Q. oes the L Micro PL comply with European Union (EU) irectives?. The Micro PL has met the requirements of the European Union irectives (E). L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

26 hapter : Getting Started Q. Which devices can I connect to the communication ports of the L?. Port : The port is RS-, fixed at baud, and uses the proprietary K-sequence protocol. The L can also connect to Modbus RTU and irectnet networks as a slave device through port. The port communicates with the following devices: V- ata ccess Unit or Optimation Operator interface panels irectsoft (running on a personal computer) -HPP handheld programmer Other devices which communicate via K-sequence protocol should work with the L Micro PL. ontact the vendor for details.. Port : The port is RS-, with selective baud rates (-,bps), address and parity. It also supports the proprietary K-sequence protocol as well as irectnet and Modbus RTU and non-sequence/print protocols. Q. an the L accept V inputs?. No, volts is lower than the input ON threshold. However, many TTL logic circuits can drive the inputs if they are wired as open collector (sinking) inputs. See hapter for I/O wiring guidelines. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

27 hapter : Getting Started Notes L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

28 INSTLLTION, WIRING, N SPEIFITIONS HPTER HPTER In This hapter: Safety Guidelines Orientation to L Front Panel Mounting Guidelines Wiring Guidelines System Wiring Strategies Wiring iagrams and Specifications Glossary of Specification Terms

29 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Safety Guidelines NOTE: Products with E marks perform their required functions safely and adhere to relevant standards as specified by E directives provided they are used according to their intended purpose and that the instructions in this manual are adhered to. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual. listing of our international affiliates is available on our Web site: WRNING: Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and equipment is your responsibility and should be your primary goal during system planning and installation. utomation systems can fail and may result in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment. o not rely on the automation system alone to provide a safe operating environment. You should use external electromechanical devices, such as relays or limit switches, that are independent of the PL application to provide protection for any part of the system that may cause personal injury or damage. Every automation application is different, so there may be special requirements for your particular application. Make sure you follow all national, state, and local government requirements for the proper installation and use of your equipment. Plan for Safety The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and equipment safety part of the planning process. You should examine every aspect of the system to determine which areas are critical to operator or machine safety. If you are not familiar with PL system installation practices, or your company does not have established installation guidelines, you should obtain additional information from the following sources. NEM The National Electrical Manufacturers ssociation, located in Washington,.., publishes many different documents that discuss standards for industrial control systems. You can order these publications directly from NEM. Some of these include: IS, General Standards for Industrial ontrol and Systems IS, Industrial Systems IS, Enclosures for Industrial ontrol Systems NE The National Electrical ode provides regulations concerning the installation and use of various types of electrical equipment. opies of the NE Handbook can often be obtained from your local electrical equipment distributor or your local library. Local and State gencies many local governments and state governments have additional requirements above and beyond those described in the NE Handbook. heck with your local Electrical Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

30 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Three Levels of Protection The publications mentioned provide many ideas and requirements for system safety. t a minimum, you should follow these regulations. lso, you should use the following techniques, which provide three levels of system control. Emergency stop switch for disconnecting system power Mechanical disconnect for output module power Orderly system shutdown sequence in the PL control program Emergency Stops It is recommended that emergency stop circuits be incorporated into the system for every machine controlled by a PL. For maximum safety in a PL system, these circuits must not be wired into the controller, but should be hardwired external to the PL. The emergency stop switches should be easily accessed by the operator and are generally wired into a master control relay (MR) or a safety control relay (SR) that will remove power from the PL I/O system in an emergency. MRs and SRs provide a convenient means for removing power from the I/O system during an emergency situation. y de-energizing an MR (or SR) coil, power to the input (optional) and output devices is removed. This event occurs when any emergency stop switch opens. However, the PL continues to receive power and operate even though all its inputs and outputs are disabled. The MR circuit could be extended by placing a PL fault relay (closed during normal PL operation) in series with any other emergency stop conditions. This would cause the MR circuit to drop the PL I/O power in case of a PL failure (memory error, I/O communications error, etc.). Guard Line Switch Emergency Stop E STOP MR MR Use E-Stop and Master Relay Power On Guard? Link L to Output ommons L to Input ommons (optional) Master Relay Saw rbor L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

31 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Emergency Power isconnect properly rated emergency power disconnect should be used to power the PL controlled system as a means of removing the power from the entire control system. It may be necessary to install a capacitor across the disconnect to protect against a condition known as outrush. This condition occurs when the output Triacs are turned off by powering off the disconnect, thus causing the energy stored in the inductive loads to seek the shortest distance to ground, which is often through the Triacs. fter an emergency shutdown or any other type of power interruption, there may be requirements that must be met before the PL control program can be restarted. For example, there may be specific register values that must be established (or maintained from the state prior to the shutdown) before operations can resume. In this case, you may want to use retentive memory locations, or include constants in the control program to insure a known starting point. Orderly System Shutdown Ideally, the first level of fault detection is the PL control program, which can identify machine problems. ertain shutdown sequences should be performed. The types of problems are usually things such as jammed parts, etc. that do not pose a risk of personal injury or equipment damage. WRNING: The control program must not be the only form of protection for any problems that may result in a risk of personal injury or equipment damage. Jam etect lass, ivision pproval This equipment is suitable for use in lass, ivision, groups,, and or nonhazardous locations only. Turn off Saw WRNING: - Explosion Hazard! Substitution of components may impair suitability for lass, ivision. WRNING: - o not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or area is known to be non-hazardous. RST RST Retract L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

32 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Orientation to L Front Panel Most connections, indicators, and labels on the L Micro PLs are located on its front panel. The communication ports are located on the top side of the PL. Please refer to the drawing below. Mounting tab Input Status Indicators Mode Switch ommunication Ports External Power iscrete Input iscrete Output Output ircuit Power Input Inputs Terminals Terminals (for output versions only) Output Status Indicators Status Indicators Mounting tab The upper section of the connector accepts external power connections on the two left-most terminals. From left to right, the next five terminals are one of the input commons () and input connections X, X, X, and X. The remaining four connections are an output common () and output terminals Y, Y, and Y. The lower section of the connector has the chassis ground (G) and the logic ground (LG) on the two left-most terminals. The next two terminals are for the inputs X and X. Next is the other input common () followed by inputs X and X. The last four terminals are for outputs Y, Y, Y, and the second output common (). On output units, the end terminal on the right accepts power for the output stage. n option slot is located on the right end of the PL. This is where the simulator module can be installed for testing. Option module descriptions available for the L can be found either in the L/L Options Modules User Manual, -OPTIONS-M, in our catalog or on our website. WRNING: For some applications, field device power may still be present on the terminal block even though the Micro PL is turned off. To minimize the risk of electrical shock, check all field device power before you expose or remove either connector wire from under a terminal block, or two WG wires (one on each side of the screw). L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

33 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications onnector Removal ll of the terminals for the L are contained on one connector block. In some instances, it may be desirable to remove the connector block for easy wiring. The connector is designed for easy removal with just a small screwdriver. The drawing below shows the procedure for removal at one end. onnector Removal. Loosen the retention screws on each end of the connector block.. From the center of the connector block, pry upward with the screwdriver until the connector is loose. The terminal block connector on L PLs has regular screw terminals, which will accept either standard blade-type or # Philips screwdriver tips. Use No. to WG solid/stranded wire. The maximum torque is.nm (. inch-lbs). Spare terminal block connectors and connector covers may be ordered by individual part numbers: Spare Parts -Terminal lock and over Part Number Qty Per Package escription F-IOON L I/O Terminal lock -- each L I/O Terminal lock, I/O Terminal lock over, and Option Slot over L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

34 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Mounting Guidelines In addition to the panel layout guidelines, other specifications can affect the definition and installation of a PL system. lways consider the following: Environmental Specifications Power Requirements gency pprovals Enclosure Selection and omponent imensions Unit imensions The following diagram shows the outside dimensions and mounting hole locations for all versions of the L. Make sure you follow the installation guidelines to allow proper spacing from other components.." mm." mm." mm." mm." mm." mm." mm." mounting tab mm." mm (IN Rail) Enclosures Your selection of a proper enclosure is important to ensure safe and proper operation of your L system. pplications of L systems vary and may require additional features. The minimum considerations for enclosures include: onformance to electrical standards Protection from the elements in an industrial environment ommon ground reference Maintenance of specified ambient temperature ccess to equipment Security or restricted access Sufficient space for proper installation and maintenance of equipment." mm." mm." mm L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

35 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Panel Layout & learances There are many things to consider when designing the panel layout. The following items correspond to the diagram shown. Note: there may be additional requirements, depending on your application and use of other components in the cabinet.. Mount the PLs horizontally as shown below to provide proper ventilation. You cannot mount the L units OK vertically, upside down, or on a flat horizontal surface. If you place more than one unit in a cabinet, there must be a minimum of. (mm) between the units.. Provide a minimum clearance of (mm) between the irflow unit and all sides of the cabinet. Note, remember to allow for any operator panels or other items mounted in the door.. There should also be at least (mm) of clearance between the unit and any wiring ducts that run parallel to the terminals.. The ground terminal on the L base must be connected to a single point ground. Use copper stranded wire to achieve a low impedance. opper eye lugs should be crimped and soldered to the ends of the stranded wire to ensure good surface contact. Remove anodized finishes and use copper lugs and star washers at termination points. NOTE: There is a minimum clearance requirement of (cm) between the panel door (or any devices mounted in the panel door) and the nearest L component. Panel Star Washers Ground braid copper lugs Star Washers Panel or single point ground Power Source Temperature Probe. There must be a single point ground (i.e. copper bus bar) for all devices in the panel requiring an earth ground return. The single point of ground must be connected to the panel ground termination. The panel ground termination must be connected to earth ground. Minimum wire sizes, color coding, and general safety practices should comply with appropriate electrical codes and standards for your area.. good common ground reference (Earth ground) is essential for proper operation of the L. One side of all control and power circuits and the ground lead on flexible shielded cable must be properly connected to common ground reference. Methods which provide a good common ground reference, include: a) Installing a ground rod as close to the panel as possible. b) onnection to incoming power system ground. Panel Ground Terminal usar " mm min " mm min " mm min L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

36 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications. Evaluate any installations where the ambient temperature may approach the lower or upper limits of the specifications. If you suspect the ambient temperature will not be within the operating specification for the L system, measures such as installing a cooling/heating source must be taken to get the ambient temperature within the range of specifications.. The L systems are designed to be powered by - V or V normally available throughout an industrial environment. Electrical power in some areas where the PLs are installed is not always stable and storms can cause power surges. ue to this, powerline filters are recommended for protecting the L PLs from power surges and EMI/RFI noise. The utomation Powerline Filter, for use with V and V, mps (part number PFN), is an excellent choice, however, you can use a filter of your choice. These units install easily between the power source and the PL. NOTE: If you are using other components in your system, make sure you refer to the appropriate manual to determine how those units can affect mounting dimensions. Using IN Rail Mounting Rails L Micro PLs can be secured to a panel by using mounting rails. We recommend rails that conform to IN EN standard. They are approximately mm high, with a depth of mm. If you mount the Micro PL on a rail, do consider using end brackets on each side of the PL. The end bracket helps keep the PL from sliding horizontally along the rail, reducing the possibility of accidentally pulling the wiring loose. On the bottom of the PL is a small retaining clip. To secure the PL to a IN rail, place it onto the rail and gently push up on the clip to lock it onto the rail. To remove the PL, pull down on the retaining clip, lift up on the PL slightly, then pulling it away from the rail. in Rail imensions mm mm in Rail Slot Use mm x mm rail conforming to IN EN Retaining clip NOTE: Refer to our catalog for a complete listing of INnector connection systems. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

37 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications that generally apply to L Micro PLs. The ranges that vary for the Handheld Programmer are noted at the bottom of this chart. ertain output circuit types may have derating curves, depending on the ambient temperature and the number of outputs ON. Please refer to the appropriate section in this chapter pertaining to your particular L PL. * Operating temperature for the Handheld Programmer and the V is to F ( to ) Storage temperature for the Handheld Programmer and the V is to F ( to ). ** Equipment will operate down to % relative humidity. However, static electricity problems occur much more frequently at low humidity levels (below %). Make sure you take adequate precautions when you touch the equipment. onsider using ground straps, antistatic floor coverings, etc. if you use the equipment in low-humidity environments. Environmental Specifications Specification Rating Storage temperature F to F ( to ) mbient operating temperature* F to F ( to ) mbient humidity** % % relative humidity (non condensing) Vibration resistance MIL ST, Method. Shock resistance MIL ST, Method. Noise immunity NEM (IS ) tmosphere No corrosive gases gency approvals UL, E, F class gency pprovals Some applications require agency approvals for particular components. The L Micro PL agency approvals are listed below: UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) UL (anadian Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) E (European Economic Union) Marine Use merican ureau of Shipping (S) certification requires flame-retarding insulation as per --/..(a). S will accept Navy low smoke cables, cable qualified to NE Plenum rated (fire resistant level ), or other similar flammability resistant rated cables. Use cable specifications for your system that meet a recognized flame retardant standard (i.e. UL, IEEE, etc.), including evidence of cable test certification (i.e. tests certificate, UL file number, etc.). NOTE: Wiring needs to be low smoke per the above paragraph. Teflon coated wire is also recommended. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

38 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring Guidelines onnect the power input wiring for the L. Observe all precautions stated earlier in this manual. Follow the guidelines in this chapter. When the wiring is complete, close the connector covers. o not apply power at this time. / V Power Input L GN - V X - X: Input Y - Y: Output / V Power Input - V W max WRNING: Once the power wiring is connected, secure the terminal block cover in the closed position. When the cover is open there is a risk of electrical shock if you accidentally touch the connection terminals or power wiring. Fuse Protection for Input Power There are no internal fuses for the input power circuits, so external circuit protection is needed to ensure the safety of service personnel and the safe operation of the equipment itself. To meet UL/UL specifications, the input power must be fused. epending on the type of input power being used, follow these fuse protection recommendations: / V Operation When operating the unit from / V, whether the voltage source is a step-down transformer or from two phases, fuse both the line (L) and neutral (N) leads. The recommended fuse size is, such as utomationirect s G, fast-acting fuse. / V Operation When operating the unit from / V, it is only necessary to fuse the line (L) lead; it is not necessary to fuse the neutral (N) lead. The recommended fuse size is.. G X - X: Input Y - Y: Output L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

39 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications / V Operation When operating at these lower voltages, wire gauge size is just as important as proper fusing techniques. Using large conductors minimizes the voltage drop in the conductor. Each L input power terminal can accommodate one WG wire or two WG wires. failure can maintain an arc for much longer time and distance than failures. Typically, the main bus is fused at a higher level than the branch device, which in this case is the L. The recommended fuse size for the branch circuit to the L is, such as utomationirect s G, fast-acting fuse. External Power Source The power source must be capable of suppling voltage and current complying with individual Micro PL specifications, according to the following specifications: Power Source Specifications Item L V Powered Units L V Powered Units Input Voltage Range / V ( V) V (.. V) Maximum Inrush urrent, ms ( V), ms ( V) < ms Maximum Power V W Voltage Withstand (dielectric) V between primary, secondary, field ground Insulation Resistance > M at V NOTE:The rating between all internal circuits is SI INSULTION ONLY. NOTE: It is possible to use an uninterruptible power supply (UPS); however, the output must be a sinusoidal waveform for the PL to perform properly. Planning the Wiring Routes The following guidelines provide general information on how to wire the I/O connections to L Micro PLs. For specific information on wiring a particular PL refer to the corresponding specification sheet further in this chapter.. Each terminal connection of the L PL can accept one WG wire or two WG size wires. o not exceed this recommended capacity.. lways use a continuous length of wire. o not splice wires to attain a needed length.. Use the shortest possible wire length.. Use wire trays for routing where possible.. void running wires near high energy wiring.. void running input wiring close to output wiring where possible.. To minimize voltage drops when wires must run a long distance, consider using multiple wires for the return line.. void running wiring in close proximity to wiring where possible.. void creating sharp bends in the wires.. Install the recommended powerline filter to reduce power surges and EMI/RFI noise. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

40 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Fuse Protection for Input and Output ircuits Input and Output circuits on L Micro PLs do not have internal fuses. In order to protect your Micro PL, we suggest you add external fuses to your I/O wiring. fast-blow fuse, with a lower current rating than the I/O bank s common current rating can be wired to each common. Or, a fuse with a rating of slightly less than the maximum current per output point can be added to each output. Refer to the Micro PL specification tables further in this chapter to find the maximum current per output point or per output common. dding the external fuse does not guarantee the prevention of Micro PL damage, but it will provide added protection. External Fuses (shown with IN Rail, Fuse locks) I/O Point Numbering ll L Micro PLs have a fixed I/O configuration. It follows the same octal numbering system used on other irectlogic family PLs, starting at X and Y. The letter X is always used to indicate inputs and the letter Y is always used for outputs. The I/O numbering always starts at zero and does not include the digits or. The reference addresses are typically assigned in groups of or, depending on the number of points in an I/O group. For the L the eight inputs use reference numbers X X. The six output points use references Y Y. If an optional input module is installed in the option slot, the reference numbers are X X. typical output module installed in the option slot will have references Y Y. See the L/ Options Modules User Manual (-OPTIONS-M) for addressing other optional modules. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

41 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications System Wiring Strategies The L Micro PL is very flexible and will work in many different wiring configurations. y studying this section before actual installation, you can probably find the best wiring strategy for your application. This will help to lower system cost, wiring errors, and avoid safety problems. PL Isolation oundaries PL circuitry is divided into three main regions separated by isolation boundaries, shown in the drawing below. Electrical isolation provides safety, so that a fault in one area does not damage another. powerline filter will provide isolation between the power source and the power supply. transformer in the power supply provides magnetic isolation between the primary and secondary sides. Opto-couplers provide optical isolation in Input and Output circuits. This isolates logic circuitry from the field side, where factory machinery connects. Note that the discrete inputs are isolated from the discrete outputs, because each is isolated from the logic side. Isolation boundaries protect the operator interface (and the operator) from power input faults or field wiring faults. When wiring a PL, it is extremely important to avoid making external connections which connect to the logic side of the PL circuits. Power input Primary Side Filter The next figure shows the internal layout of L PLs, as viewed from the front panel. L PL Main Power Supply PL Isolation oundary Main Power Supply Input ircuit Secondary,or Logic side PU Programming evice or Operator Interface PU Input ircuit Output ircuit To programming device or operator interface omm. Ports Output ircuit Field Side Isolation oundary iscrete inputs iscrete outputs Power Input Filter discrete inputs ommons discrete outputs ommons L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

42 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications onnecting Operator Interface evices Operator interfaces require data and power connections. Operator interfaces with a large RT usually require separate power. However, some small operator interface devices, such as the V- ata ccess Unit, may be powered directly from the L Micro PL. onnect the V- to communication port on the L Micro PL with a V- L. single cable contains transmit/receive data wires and +V power. L Micro PL Operator interface panels require separate power and communications connections. onnect the L with the proper cable and power supply for your application. L Micro PL onnecting Programming evices L Micro PLs are programmed using irectsoft programming software on a P. Limited programming can be accomplished with a handheld programmer. The L can be interfaced to the P with either a serial cable shown below or a Ethernet cable (Ethernet requires either an H-EOM or H-EOM module installed in the option slot). See the utomationirect catalog to chose the cable or Ethernet card for whichever method will meet your system requirements. L Micro PL RJ phone style RJ phone style V- The -HPP Handheld Programmer comes with a communications cable. For a replacement cable, order a V-L. L Micro PL RJ phone style RJ phone style RJ phone style -pin -shell male -pin -shell female RJ phone style (cable comes with HPP) HPP L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

43 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Sinking/Sourcing oncepts efore going further in our study of wiring strategies, we must have a solid understanding of sinking and sourcing concepts. Use of these terms occurs frequently in input or output circuit discussions. It is the goal of this section to make these concepts easy to understand, further ensuring your success in installation. First we give the following short definitions, followed by practical applications. Sinking = Path to supply ground ( ) Sourcing = Path to supply source (+) First you will notice that these are only associated with circuits and not, because of the reference to (+) and ( ) polarities. Therefore, sinking and sourcing terminology only applies to input and output circuits. Input and output points that are either sinking or sourcing can conduct current in only one direction. This means it is possible to connect the external supply and field device to the I/O point with current trying to flow in the wrong direction, and the circuit will not operate. However, we can successfully connect the supply and field device every time by understanding sourcing and sinking. For example, the figure to the right depicts a sinking input. To properly connect the external supply, we just have to connect it so the PL input provides a path to ground ( ). So, we start at Input the PL input terminal, follow through the input (sinking) sensing circuit, exit at the common terminal, and + connect the supply ( ) to the common terminal. Input y adding the switch, between the supply (+) and Sensing the input, we have completed the circuit. urrent ommon flows in the direction of the arrow when the switch is closed. y applying the circuit principle above to the four possible combinations of input/output sinking/sourcing types, we have the four circuits as shown below. L Micro PLs provide all except the sourcing output I/O circuit types. Sinking Input + Sourcing Input + Input ommon ommon Input PL Input Sensing PL Input Sensing Sinking Output PL Output Switch Output ommon Sourcing Output PL ommon Output Switch Output Load Load + + L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

44 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications I/O ommon Terminal oncepts In order for a PL I/O circuit to operate, current must enter at one terminal and exit at another. This means at least two terminals are associated with every I/O point. In the figure to the right, the Input or Output terminal is the main path for the current. One additional terminal must provide the return path to the power supply. If we had unlimited space and budget for I/O terminals, then every I/O point could have two dedicated terminals just as the figure above shows. However, providing this level of flexibility is not practical or even necessary for most applications. So, most Input or Output point groups on PLs share the return path among two or more I/O points. The figure to the right shows a group (or bank) of input points which share a common return path. In this way, the four inputs require only five terminals instead of eight. Note: In the circuit above, the current in the common path is times any channel s input current when all inputs are energized. This is especially important in output circuits, where heavier gauge wire is sometimes necessary on commons. Most L input and output circuits are grouped into banks that share a common return path. The best indication of I/O The I/O common grouping bar, labeled at the right, occurs in the section of wiring label below it. It indicates X, X, X, and X share the common terminal located to the left of X. The following complete label shows two banks of four inputs and two banks of three outputs. One common is provided for each bank. The following label is for output versions. One common is provided for all of the outputs and the terminal on the bottom right accepts power for the output stage. (L) (N) + + Field evice Main Path (I/O point) Return Path Input Input Input Input ommon PL PL I/O ircuit Input Sensing +V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

45 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications onnecting I/O to Solid State Field evices In the previous section on Sourcing and Sinking concepts, we explained that I/O circuits sometimes will only allow current to flow one way. This is also true for many of the field devices which have solid-state (transistor) interfaces. In other words, field devices can also be sourcing or sinking. When connecting two devices in a series circuit, one must be wired as sourcing and the other as sinking. Solid State Input Sensors The L s inputs are flexible in that they detect current flow in either direction, so they can be wired as either sourcing or sinking. In the following circuit, a field device has an opencollector NPN transistor output. It sinks current from the PL input point, which sources current. The power supply can be the F-PS + V power supply or another supply (+ V or +V), as long as the input specifications are met. Field evice Output (sinking) Ground Supply + Input (sourcing) ommon PL Input In the next circuit, a field device has an open-emitter PNP transistor output. It sources current to the PL input point, which sinks the current back to ground. Since the field device is sourcing current, no additional power supply is required. Field evice => Output (sourcing) Ground Input (sinking) ommon PL Input Solid State Output Loads Sometimes an application requires connecting a PL output point to a solid state input on a device. This type of connection is usually made to carry a low-level signal, not to send power to an actuator. The L s outputs are sinking-only. This means that each output provides a path to ground when it is energized. lso, remember that all six outputs have the same electrical common, even though there are two common terminal screws. Finally, recall that the output circuit requires power ( V) from an external power source. In the following circuit, the PL output point sinks current to the output common when energized. It is connected to a sourcing input of a field device input. PL Output + Power Power Output (sinking) ommon + Input (sourcing) - V Ground Field evice => L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

46 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications In the next example we connect a PL output point to the sinking input of a field device. This is a bit tricky, because both the PL output and field device input are sinking type. Since the circuit must have one sourcing and one sinking device, we add sourcing capability to the PL output by using a pull-up resistor. In the circuit below, we connect R pull-up from the output to the output circuit power input. PL Output + pwr (sinking) NOTE : O NOT attempt to drive a heavy load (> m) with this pull-up method. NOTE : Using the pull-up resistor to implement a sourcing output has the effect of inverting the output point logic. In other words, the field device input is energized when the PL output is OFF, from a ladder logic point-of-view. Your ladder program must comprehend this and generate an inverted output. Or, you may choose to cancel the effect of the inversion elsewhere, such as in the field device. It is important to choose the correct value of R pull-up. In order to do so, we need to know the nominal input current to the field device (I input) when the input is energized. If this value is not known, it can be calculated as shown (a typical value is m). Then use I input and the voltage of the external supply to compute R pull-up. Then calculate the power P pull-up (in watts), in order to size R pull-up properly. I input = R pull-up = V Power R pull-up (sourcing) Output ommon V supply. I input (turn on) R input input Supply R input Ground The drawing below shows the actual wiring of the L Micro PL to the supply and pull-up resistor. + Input (sinking) P pull-up = ommon Output Field evice R input V supply R pullup Supply + L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

47 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Relay Output Wiring Methods The R and the R models feature relay outputs. Relays are best for the following applications: Loads that require higher currents than the solid-state L outputs can deliver ost-sensitive applications Some output channels need isolation from other outputs (such as when some loads require while others require ) Some applications in which NOT to use relays: Loads that require currents under m Loads which must be switched at high speed and duty cycle ssuming relays are right for your application, we re now ready to explore various ways to wire relay outputs to the loads. Note that there are six normally-open SPST relays available. They are organized with three relays per common. The figure below shows the relays and the internal wiring of the PL. Note that each group is isolated from the other group of outputs. In the circuit below, all loads use the same power supply which powers the L PL. In this example, all commons are connected together. Fuse or ircuit reaker Y ommon Y Y Y Y ommon Y Line Neutral Ground Output Point Wiring In the circuit on the following page, loads for Y Y use the same power supply which powers the L PL. Loads for Y Y use a separate supply. In this example, the commons are separated according to which supply powers the associated load. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

48 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Fuse or ircuit reaker Line Ground Neutral Output Point Wiring Surge Suppression For Inductive Loads Inductive load devices (devices with a coil) generate transient voltages when de-energized with a relay contact. When a relay contact is closed it bounces, which energizes and de-energizes the coil until the bouncing stops. The transient voltages generated are much larger in amplitude than the supply voltage, especially with a supply voltage. When switching a -supplied inductive load the full supply voltage is always present when the relay contact opens (or bounces ). When switching an -supplied inductive load there will be times when the relay contact will open (or bounce ) when the sine wave is at zero crossing. If the voltage is not zero when the relay contact opens, there is energy stored in the inductor that is released when the voltage to the inductor is suddenly removed. This release of energy is the cause of the transient voltages. When inductive load devices (motors, motor starters, interposing relays, solenoids, valves, etc.) are controlled with relay contacts, it is recommended that a surge suppression device be connected directly across the coil of the field device. If the inductive device has plug-type connectors, the suppression device can be installed on the terminal block of the relay output. Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVS or transorb) provide the best surge and transient suppression of and powered coils, providing the fastest response with the smallest overshoot. Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) provide the next best surge and transient suppression of and powered coils. For example, the waveform in the figure below shows the energy released when opening a contact switching a V solenoid. Notice the large voltage spike. + V + V V Module Relay ontact + V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

49 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications This figure shows the same circuit with a transorb (TVS) across the coil. Notice that the voltage spike is significantly reduced. + V V + V V Module Relay ontact Use the following table to help select a TVS or MOV suppressor for your application based on the inductive load voltage. Surge Suppressors Vendor / atalog Type Inductive Load Voltage Part Number utomationirect Transient Voltage Suppressors, LiteOn iodes; from igi-key atalog: Phone: --- igi-key Prolonging Relay ontact Life Relay contacts wear according to the amount of relay switching, amount of spark created at the time of open or closure, and presence of airborne contaminants. There are some steps you can take to help prolong the life of relay contacts, such as switching the relay on or off only when it is necessary, and if possible, switching the load on or off at a time when it will draw the least current. lso, take measures to suppress inductive voltage spikes from inductive loads such as contactors and solenoids. PL Relay Output Output ommon TVS TVS TVS TVS iode MOV MOV R / V V / V / V / V / V / V Supply + Inductive Field evice Input ommon ZL-T- ZL-T- PKE PKGIT N NT N ontact igi-key, orp. dding external contact protection may extend relay life beyond the number of contact cycles listed in the specification tables for relay modules. High current inductive loads such as clutches, brakes, motors, direct-acting solenoid valves and motor starters will benefit the most from external contact protection. When using an R network, locate it close to the relay module output connector. To find the values for the R snubber network, first determine the voltage across the contacts when open, and the current through them when closed. If the load supply is, then convert the current and voltage values to peak values. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

50 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Now you are ready to calculate values for R and, according to the formulas: (μf) = I For example, suppose a relay contact drives a load at V, /. Since this example has an power source, first calculate the peak values: Now, finding the values of R and,: R ( Ω) = V x x I, where x = + minimum =. μf, the voltage rating of must be V, non-polarized R minimum =. Ω, / W, tolerance is ± % (μf) = R (Ω) = x = For inductive loads in circuits we recommend using a suppression diode as shown in the diagram. When the load is energized the diode is reverse-biased (high impedance). When the load is turned off, energy stored in its coil is released in the form of a negative-going voltage spike. t this moment the diode is forward-biased (low impedance) and shunts the energy to ground. This protects the relay contacts from the high voltage arc that would occur just as the contacts are opening. WRNING: O NOT use this circuit with an power supply. Place the diode as close to the inductive field device as possible. Use a diode with a peak inverse voltage rating (PIV) at least PIV, forward current or larger. Use a fast-recovery type (such as Schottky type). O NOT use a small-signal diode such as N, N, etc. e sure the diode is in the circuit correctly before operation. If installed backwards, it will short-circuit the supply when the relay energizes. O NOT use this circuit with an power supply. V I peak = I rms x., =. x. =. mperes V peak = V rms x. = x. =. Volts I V x x I =. =. μf, voltage rating Volts, where x = + + =. R (Ω) =. V. x.. = Ω, / W, ± % L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

51 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Input Wiring Methods PL Input L Micro PLs with inputs are particularly Input flexible because they can be either sinking or sourcing. The dual diodes (shown to the right) allow.. V. The target applications are + V and + V. You can actually wire half of ommon the inputs as sinking and the other half as sourcing. Inputs grouped by a common must be all sinking or all sourcing. In the first and simplest example below, all commons are connected together and all inputs are sinking. + V + In the next example, the first four inputs are sinking, and the last four are sourcing. + + V + V + L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

52 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Output Wiring Methods L output circuits are high-performance transistor switches with low on-resistance and fast switching times. Please note the following characteristics which are unique to the output type: There is only one electrical common for all six outputs. ll six outputs belong to one bank. The output switches are current-sinking only. However, you can still use different voltages from one load to another. The output circuit inside the PL requires external power. The supply ( ) must be connected to a common terminal, and the supply (+) connects the right-most terminal on the upper connector. In the example below, all six outputs share a common supply. In the next example below, the outputs have split supplies. The first three outputs are using a + V supply, and the last three are using a + V supply. However, you can split the outputs among any number of supplies, as long as: all supply voltages are within the specified range all output points are wired as sinking all source ( ) terminals are connected together + V + V + + Output Point Wiring Output Point Wiring + + V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

53 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications High Speed I/O Wiring Methods L versions with type input or output points contain a dedicated High-Speed I/O circuit (HSIO). The circuit configuration is programmable, and it processes select I/O points independently from the PU scan. hapter discusses the programming options for HSIO. While the HSIO circuit has six modes, we show wiring diagrams for two of the most popular modes in this chapter. The high-speed input interfaces to points X X. Properly configured, the L can count quadrature pulses at up to khz. Encoder Input Wiring L versions with type output points can use the High Speed I/O Pulse Output feature. It can generate high-speed pulses up to KHz for specialized control such as stepper motor / intelligent drive systems. Output Y and Y can generate pulse and direction signals, or it can generate W and W pulse signals respectively. See ppendix E on high-speed input and pulse output options. Motor Phase Phase mplifier Signal ommon + Signal ommon Pulse irection V Encoder + + V Power Input Pulse Output Wiring L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

54 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications This page is intentionally left blank. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

55 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Wiring iagrams and Specifications The remainder of this chapter dedicates two pages to each of the eight versions of L Micro PLs. Each section contains a basic wiring diagram, equivalent I/O circuits, and specification tables. Please refer to the section which describes the particular L version used in your application. R I/O Wiring iagram The R Micro PL features eight inputs and six relay contact outputs. The following diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The external power connection uses four terminals at the left as shown. Power input wiring - V - V - V Equivalent Input ircuit Input point wiring Output point wiring The eight input channels use terminals in the middle of the connector. Inputs are organized into two banks of four. Each bank has a common terminal. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent input circuit shows one channel of a typical bank. PUT L OM Line V V - V or - V Internal module circuitry Equivalent Output ircuit +V To LE erating hart for Relay Outputs L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

56 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications The six relay output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. Outputs are organized into two banks of three normally-open relay contacts. Each bank has a common terminal. The wiring example on the last page shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent output circuit shows one channel of a typical bank. The relay contacts can switch or voltages. -R General Specifications External Power Requirements V, V maximum, ommunication Port, baud (Fixed), data bits, stop bit, odd parity K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Slave), Modbus (Slave) ommunication Port, baud (default), data bits, stop bit, odd parity Programming cable type K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Master/Slave), Modbus (Master/Slave) Non-sequence/print SL Operating Temperature to F ( to ) Storage Temperature to F ( to ) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST. Shock MIL ST. Noise Immunity NEM IS Terminal Type Removable Wire Gauge One WG or two WG, WG minimum Input Specifications X-X Input Voltage Range (Min. - Max.) V, - Hz Operating Voltage Range V, - Hz Input urrent V at Hz, V at Hz Max. Input urrent V at Hz, V at Hz Input Impedance Hz, Hz ON urrent/voltage > V OFF urrent/voltage < V OFF to ON Response < ms ON to OFF Response < ms Status Indicators Logic Side ommons channels/common x banks Relay Output Specifications Y-Y Output Voltage Range (Min. Max.) V ( - Hz), V Operating Voltage Range V ( - Hz), V Output urrent /point, / common Max. leakage current. Smallest Recommended Load V OFF to ON Response < ms ON to OFF Response < ms Status Indicators Logic Side ommons channels/common x banks Fuses None (external recommended) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

57 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications - V R I/O Wiring iagram These micro PLs feature eight inputs and six relay contact outputs. The following diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The external power connection uses four terminals at the left as shown. Power input wiring - V Source Sink - V Source Sink Input point wiring Equivalent ircuit, High-speed Inputs (X-X) Equivalent Output ircuit erating hart for Relay Outputs Output point wiring - V Source - V or - V The eight input channels use terminals in the middle of the connector. Inputs are organized into two banks of four. Each bank has an isolated common terminal, and may be wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent circuit for standard inputs and the high-speed input circuit are shown above. The six output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. Outputs are organized into two banks of three normally-open relay contacts. Each bank has a common terminal. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent output circuit shows one channel of a typical bank. The relay contacts can switch or voltages. Sink Equivalent ircuit, Standard Inputs (X-X) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

58 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications -R General Specifications External Power Requirements V, V maximum, ommunication Port, baud (Fixed), data bits, stop bit, odd parity K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Slave), Modbus (Slave) ommunication Port, baud (default), data bits, stop bit, odd parity Programming cable type K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Master/Slave), Modbus (Master/Slave) Non-sequence / print SL Operating Temperature to F ( to ) Storage Temperature to F ( to ) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST. Shock MIL ST. Noise Immunity NEM IS Terminal Type Removable Wire Gauge One WG or two WG, WG minimum Input Specifications Parameter High Speed Inputs, X X Standard Inputs X X Min. - Max. Voltage Range.. V.. V Operating Voltage Range - V - V Peak Voltage V ( khz maximum frequency) V Minimum Pulse Width µs N/ ON Voltage Level > V > V OFF Voltage Level <. V <. V Input Impedance. V. V Max. Input urrent @V Minimum ON urrent > m > m Maximum OFF urrent <. m <. m OFF to ON Response < µs ms, ms typical ON to OFF Response < µs ms, ms typical Status Indicators Logic side Logic side ommons channels/common x bank Relay Output Specifications Output Voltage Range (Min. - Max.) - V ( - Hz), - V Operating Voltage - V ( - Hz), - V Output urrent / point, / common Maximum Voltage V, V Max leakage current. V Smallest Recommended Load m OFF to ON Response < ms ON to OFF Response < ms Status Indicators Logic Side ommons channels/common x banks Fuses None (external recommended) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

59 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications I/O Wiring iagram The Micro PL features eight inputs and six outputs. The following diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The external power connection uses four terminals at the left as shown. Power input wiring - V - V Source - V Sink Input point wiring Equivalent Input ircuit erating hart for Outputs Output point wiring - V - V - V Equivalent Output ircuit The eight input channels use terminals in the middle of the connector. Inputs are organized into two banks of four. Each bank has an isolated common terminal. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent input circuit shows one channel of a typical bank. The six current sinking output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. ll outputs actually share the same electrical common. Note the requirement for external power on the end (right-most) terminal. The equivalent output circuit shows one channel of the bank of six. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

60 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications - General Specifications External Power Requirements V, V maximum, ommunication Port, baud (Fixed), data bits, stop bit, odd parity K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Slave), Modbus (Slave) ommunication Port, baud (default), data bits, stop bit, odd parity Programming cable type K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Master/Slave), Modbus (Master/Slave) Non-sequence/print SL Operating Temperature to F ( to ) Storage Temperature to F ( to ) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST. Shock MIL ST. Noise Immunity NEM IS Terminal Type Removable Wire Gauge One WG or two WG, WG minimum Input Specifications Input Voltage Range (Min. - Max.) V, - Hz Operating Voltage Range V, - Hz Input urrent V (Hz), V (Hz) Max. Input urrent V (Hz), V (Hz) Input Impedance Hz, Hz ON urrent/voltage > V OFF urrent/voltage < V OFF to ON Response < ms ON to OFF Response < ms Status Indicators Logic Side ommons channels/common x banks Output Specifications Parameter Pulse Outputs, Y Y Standard Outputs, Y Y Min. - Max. Voltage Range V V Operating Voltage V V Peak Voltage < V ( khz max. frequency) < V On Voltage rop. Max urrent (resistive). /pt. (/point for standard pt.). /point Max leakage current V V Max inrush current for ms for ms External power required - V max m - V max m OFF to ON Response < µs < µs ON to OFF Response < µs < µs Status Indicators Logic Side Logic Side ommons channels/common x bank Fuses None None L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

61 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications I/O Wiring iagram These micro PLs feature eight inputs and six outputs. The following diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The external power connection uses four terminals at the left as shown. - V Power input wiring - V - V Source Sink - V Source Sink Input point wiring Equivalent ircuit, High Speed Input (X-X) Equivalent ircuit, Standard Output (Y-Y) erating hart for Outputs - V Equivalent ircuit, Pulse Output (Y-Y) Output point wiring Source - V - V - V The eight input channels use terminals in the middle of the connector. Inputs are organized into two banks of four. Each bank has an isolated common terminal, and may be wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent circuits for standard inputs and the high-speed inputs are shown above. The six current sinking output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. ll outputs actually share the same electrical common. Note the requirement for external power on the end (right-most) terminal. The equivalent output circuit shows one channel of the bank of six. Sink Equivalent ircuit, Standard Input (X-X) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

62 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications - General Specifications External Power Requirements V, V maximum, ommunication Port, baud (Fixed), data bits, stop bit, odd parity ommunication Port, baud (default), data bits, stop bit, odd parity Programming cable type K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Slave), Modbus (Slave) K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Master/Slave), Modbus (Master/Slave) Non-sequence/print SL Operating Temperature to F ( to ) Storage Temperature to F ( to ) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST. Shock MIL ST. Noise Immunity NEM IS Terminal Type Removable Wire Gauge One WG or two WG, WG minimum Input Specifications Parameter High Speed Inputs, X X Standard Inputs X X Min. - Max. Voltage Range.. V.. V Operating Voltage Range V V Peak Voltage V ( khz maximum frequency) V Minimum Pulse Width µs N/ ON Voltage Level >. V >. V OFF Voltage Level <. V <. V Max. Input urrent @V Input Impedance. V. V Minimum ON urrent > m > m Maximum OFF urrent <. m <. m OFF to ON Response < µs ms ms typical ON to OFF Response < µs ms ms typical Status Indicators Logic side Logic side ommons channels/common x banks Output Specifications Parameter Pulse Outputs Y Y Standard Outputs Y Y Min. - Max. Voltage Range V V Operating Voltage V V Peak Voltage < V ( khz max. frequency) < V On Voltage rop. Max urrent (resistive). /pt., /pt. as standard pt.. /point Max leakage V Max inrush current for ms for ms External power required - V Max m - V Max m OFF to ON Response < µ s < µs ON to OFF Response < µs < µs Status Indicators Logic Side Logic Side ommons channels/common x bank Fuses None (external recommended) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

63 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications I/O Wiring iagram The Micro PL features eight inputs and six outputs. The following diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The external power connection uses four terminals at the left as shown. Power input wiring - V - V Source Sink - V Equivalent Input ircuit Input point wiring Output point wiring The eight input channels use terminals in the middle of the connector. Inputs are organized into two banks of four. Each bank has an isolated common terminal. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent input circuit shows one channel of a typical bank. The six output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. Outputs are organized into two banks of three triac switches. Each bank has a common terminal. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The erating hart for Outputs equivalent output circuit shows one channel of a typical bank. - V Equivalent Output ircuit L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

64 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications - General Specifications External Power Requirements V, V maximum, ommunication Port, baud (Fixed), data bits, stop bit odd parity K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Slave), Modbus (Slave) ommunication Port, baud (default) data bits, stop bit odd parity Programming cable type K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Master/Slave), Modbus (Master/Slave) Non-sequence/print SL Operating Temperature to F ( to ) Storage Temperature to F ( to ) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST. Shock MIL ST. Noise Immunity NEM IS Terminal Type Removable Wire Gauge One WG or two WG, WG minimum Input Specifications Input Voltage Range (Min. - Max.) Operating Voltage Range Input urrent Max. Input urrent Input Impedance ON urrent/voltage OFF urrent/voltage OFF to ON Response ON to OFF Response Status Indicators ommons V, - Hz V, - Hz V at Hz V at Hz V at Hz V at Hz Hz, Hz > V < V < ms < ms Logic Side channels/common x banks Output Specifications Output Voltage Range (Min. - Max.) V, Hz Operating Voltage V, Hz On Voltage rop. V (>m). V (<m) Max urrent. /point,. /common Max leakage current < V Max inrush current for ms Minimum Load m OFF to ON Response ms ON to OFF Response ms +/ cycle Status Indicators Logic Side ommons channels/common x banks Fuses None (external recommended) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

65 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications I/O Wiring iagram The Micro PL features eight inputs and six outputs. The following diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The external power connection uses four terminals at the left as shown. Power input wiring - V - V Source - V Sink Source Sink Input point wiring Equivalent ircuit, High Speed Input (X-X) Equivalent ircuit, Output Output point wiring Source - V Sink - V Equivalent ircuit, Standard Input (X-X) The eight input channels use terminals in the middle of the connector. Inputs are organized into two banks of four. Each bank has an isolated common terminal, and may be wired as sinking or sourcing inputs. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent circuit for standard inputs and the highspeed input circuit are shown above. The six output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. Outputs are organized into two banks of three triac switches. Each bank has a common terminal. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent output circuit shows one channel of a typical bank. erating hart for Outputs L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

66 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications - General Specifications External Power Requirements V, V maximum, ommunication Port, baud (Fixed), data bits, stop bit, odd parity ommunication Port, baud (default), data bits, stop bit, odd parity Programming cable type K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Slave), Modbus (Slave) K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Master/Slave), Modbus (Master/Slave) Non-sequence/print SL Operating Temperature to F ( to ) Storage Temperature to F ( to ) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST. Shock MIL ST. Noise Immunity NEM IS Terminal Type Removable Wire Gauge One WG or two WG, WG minimum Input Specifications Parameter High Speed Inputs, X X Standard Inputs X X Input Voltage Range.. V.. V Operating Voltage Range V V Maximum Voltage V ( khz maximum frequency) V Minimum Pulse Width µs N/ ON Voltage Level > V > V OFF Voltage Level <. V <. V Input Impedance. V. V Minimum ON urrent > m > m Maximum OFF urrent <. m <. m OFF to ON Response < µs ms, ms typical ON to OFF Response < µs ms, ms typical Status Indicators Logic side Logic side ommons channels / common x banks Output Specifications Output Voltage Range (Min. - Max.) V, Hz Operating Voltage V, Hz On Voltage rop. m, m Max urrent. /point,. /common Max leakage current < V, Hz Max inrush current for ms Minimum Load m OFF to ON Response ms ON to OFF Response ms +/ cycle Status Indicators Logic Side ommons channels / common x banks Fuses None (external recommended) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

67 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications R- I/O Wiring iagram These micro PLs feature eight inputs and six relay contact outputs. The following diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The external power connection uses three terminals at the left as shown. Power input wiring - V - V Source -V W max. - V Source Sink Sink X - X: Input Input point wiring Equivalent ircuit, High-speed Input (X-X) Equivalent ircuit, Standard Output erating hart for Relay Outputs Y - Y: Output L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. Output point wiring Source - V Sink - V Equivalent ircuit, Standard Input (X-X) The eight input channels use terminals in the middle of the connector. Inputs are organized into two banks of four. Each bank has an isolated common terminal, and may be wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent circuit for standard inputs and the high-speed input circuit are shown above. The six output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. Outputs are organized into two banks of three normally-open relay contacts. Each bank has a common terminal. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent output circuit shows one channel of a typical bank. The relay contacts can switch or voltages.

68 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications -R- General Specifications External Power Requirements V, W maximum, ommunication Port, baud (Fixed), data bits, stop bit, odd parity K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Slave), Modbus (Slave) ommunication Port, baud (default), data bits, stop bit, odd parity K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Master/Slave), Modbus (Master/Slave) Non-sequence/print Programming cable type SL Operating Temperature to F ( to ) Storage Temperature to F ( to ) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST. Shock MIL ST. Noise Immunity NEM IS Terminal Type Removable Wire Gauge One WG or two WG, WG minimum Input Specifications Parameter High Speed Inputs, X X Standard Inputs X X Min. - Max. Voltage Range.. V.. V Operating Voltage Range - V - V Peak Voltage V ( khz maximum frequency) V Minimum Pulse Width µs N/ ON Voltage Level > V > V OFF Voltage Level <. V <. V Input Impedance. V. V Max. Input @V Minimum ON urrent > m > m Maximum OFF urrent <. m <. m OFF to ON Response < µs ms, ms typical ON to OFF Response < µs ms, ms typical Status Indicators Logic side Logic side ommons channels / common x banks Relay Output Specifications Output Voltage Range (Min. - Max.) - V ( - Hz), - V Operating Voltage - V ( - Hz), - V Output urrent /point /common Maximum Voltage V, V Max leakage current. V Smallest Recommended Load m OFF to ON Response < ms ON to OFF Response < ms Status Indicators Logic Side ommons channels/common x banks Fuses None (external recommended) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

69 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications I/O Wiring iagram These micro PLs feature eight inputs and six outputs. The following diagram shows a typical field wiring example. The external power connection uses four terminals at the left as shown. Power input wiring - V - V - V Source - V Sink -V W max. Source X - X: Input Sink Input point wiring Equivalent ircuit, High Speed Input (X-X) Equivalent ircuit, Standard Output (Y-Y) erating hart for Outputs - V Y - Y: Output Output point wiring Equivalent ircuit, Pulse Output (Y-Y) Source L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. - V - V Sink - V Equivalent ircuit, Standard Input (X-X) The eight input channels use terminals in the middle of the connector. Inputs are organized into two banks of four. Each bank has an isolated common terminal, and may be wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs. The wiring example above shows all commons connected together, but separate supplies and common circuits may be used. The equivalent circuit for standard inputs and the highspeed input circuit are shown above. The six current sinking output channels use terminals on the right side of the connector. ll outputs actually share the same electrical common. Note the requirement for external power on the end (right-most) terminal. The equivalent output circuit shows one channel of the bank of six.

70 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications -- General Specifications External Power Requirements V, W maximum, ommunication Port, baud (Fixed), data bits, stop bit, odd parity ommunication Port, baud (default), data bits, stop bit, odd parity Programming cable type K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Slave), Modbus (Slave) K Sequence (Slave), irectnet (Master/Slave), Modbus (Master/Slave) Non-sequence/print SL Operating Temperature to F ( to ) Storage Temperature to F ( to ) Relative Humidity to % (non-condensing) Environmental air No corrosive gases permitted Vibration MIL ST. Shock MIL ST. Noise Immunity NEM IS Terminal Type Removable Wire Gauge One WG or two WG, WG minimum Input Specifications Parameter High Speed Inputs, X X Standard Inputs X X Min. - Max. Voltage Range.. V.. V Operating Voltage Range V V Peak Voltage V ( khz maximum frequency) V Minimum Pulse Width µs N/ ON Voltage Level >. V >. V OFF Voltage Level <. V <. V Max. Input urrent @V Input Impedance. V. V Minimum ON urrent > m > m Maximum OFF urrent <. m <. m OFF to ON Response < µs ms, ms typical ON to OFF Response < µs ms, ms typical Status Indicators Logic side Logic side ommons channels / common x banks Output Specifications Parameter Pulse Outputs, Y Y Standard Outputs, Y Y Min. - Max. Voltage Range V V Operating Voltage V V Peak Voltage < V ( khz max. frequency) < V On Voltage rop. Max urrent (resistive). /pt., /pt. as standard pt.. /point Max leakage current V V Max inrush current for ms for ms External power required - V Max m - V Max m OFF to ON Response < µs < µs ON to OFF Response < µs < µs Status Indicators Logic Side Logic Side ommons channels / common x bank Fuses None (external recommended) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

71 hapter : Installation, Wiring, and Specifications Glossary of Specification Terms iscrete Input One of eight input connections to the PL which converts an electrical signal from a field device to a binary status (off or on), which is read by the internal PU each PL scan. iscrete Output One of six output connections from the PL which converts an internal ladder program result ( or ) to turn On or Off an output switching device. This enables the program to turn on and off large field loads. I/O ommon connection in the input or output terminals which is shared by multiple I/O circuits. It usually is in the return path to the power supply of the I/O circuit. Input Voltage Range The operating voltage range of the input circuit. Maximum Voltage Maximum voltage allowed for the input circuit. ON Voltage Level The minimum voltage level at which the input point will turn ON. OFF Voltage Level The maximum voltage level at which the input point will turn OFF. Input Impedance Input impedance can be used to calculate input current for a particular operating voltage. Input urrent Typical operating current for an active (ON) input. Minimum ON urrent The minimum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the ON state. Maximum OFF urrent The maximum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the OFF state. OFF to ON Response The time the module requires to process an OFF to ON state transition. ON to OFF Response The time the module requires to process an ON to OFF state transition. Status Indicators The LEs that indicate the ON/OFF status of an input or output point. ll LEs on L Micro PLs are electrically located on the logic side of the input or output circuit. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

72 HPTER PU SPEIFITIONS N OPERTION In This hapter: Introduction PU Specifications PU Hardware Setup PU Operation I/O Response Time PU Scan Time onsiderations Memory Map L System V-memory L liases X Input it Map Y Output it Map ontrol Relay it Map Stage ontrol/status it Map Timer Status it Map ounter Status it Map

73 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Introduction The entral Processing Unit (PU) is the heart of the Micro PL. lmost all PL operations are controlled by the PU, so it is important that it is set up correctly. This chapter provides the information needed to understand: Steps required to set up the PU Operation of ladder programs Organization of Variable Memory Power Input L PL Main Power Supply Input ircuit Output ircuit NOTE: The High-Speed I/O function (HSIO) consists of dedicated but configurable hardware in the L. It is not considered part of the PU, because it does not execute the ladder program. For more on HSIO operation, see ppendix E. L PU Features The L Micro PL which has K words of memory comprised of K of ladder memory and K words of V-memory (data registers). Program storage is in the FLSH memory which is a part of the PU board in the PL. In addition, there is RM with the PU which will store system parameters, V-memory, and other data which is not in the application program. The RM is backed up by a super-capacitor, storing the data for several hours in the event of a power outage. The capacitor automatically charges during powered operation of the PL. The L supports fixed I/O which includes eight discrete input points and six output points. If more than the fourteen fixed I/O points are needed, select an I/O module for your application from the L/ Option Modules User Manual. This module will plug into the expansion slot. Over different instructions are available for program development as well as extensive internal diagnostics that can be monitored from the application program or from an operator interface. hapters,, and provide detailed descriptions of the instructions. The L provides two built-in RS communication ports, so you can easily connect a handheld programmer, operator interface, or a personal computer without needing any additional hardware. PU To Programming evice or Operator Interface omm. Ports iscrete Inputs ommons iscrete Outputs ommons L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

74 PU Specifications hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Specifications Feature L Total Program memory (words) K Ladder memory (words) Total V-memory (words) User V-memory (words) Non-volatile V-Memory (words) ontact execution (boolean).us Typical scan (k boolean)..ms RLL Ladder Style Programming Yes RLL and RLL PLUS Programming Yes Run Time Edits Yes Supports Overrides Yes Scan Variable / fixed Handheld programmer Yes irectsoft programming for Windows. Yes uilt-in communication ports (RS) Yes FLSH Memory Standard on PU Local iscrete I/O points available Local nalog input / output channels maximum None High-Speed I/O (quad., pulse out, interrupt, pulse catch, etc.) Yes, I/O Point ensity inputs, outputs Number of instructions available (see hapter for details) ontrol relays Special relays (system defined) Stages in RLL PLUS Timers ounters Immediate I/O Yes Interrupt input (external/timed) Yes Subroutines Yes For/Next Loops Yes Math Integer rum Sequencer Instruction Yes Time of ay lock/alendar Only with the optional Memory artridge Internal diagnostics Yes Password security Yes System error log No User error log No attery backup No (built in super cap) Yes, with memory cartridge L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

75 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation PU Hardware Setup ommunication Port Pinout iagrams ables are available that allow you to quickly and easily connect a Handheld Programmer or a personal computer to the L PLs. However, if you need to build your own cables, use the pinout information shown below. The L PLs require an RJ- phone plug to fit the built-in jacks. The Micro PL has two built-in RS communication ports. Port is generally used for connecting to a -HPP, a P with irectsoft, operator interface, Modbus slave, or a irectnet slave. The baud rate is fixed at baud for port. Port can be used to connect to a -HPP, irectsoft, operator interface, Modbus master/slave, or a irectnet master/slave. Port has a range of speeds from baud to.k baud. -pin Female Modular onnector NOTE: The V pins are rated at m maximum, primarily for use with some operator interface units. Port Pin escriptions V Power ( ) connection (GN) V Power (+) connection RX Receive ata (RS) TX Transmit ata (RS V Power (+) conection V Power ( ) connection (GN) ommunication Port Top View om onnects to HPP, irectsoft, operator interfaces, etc. -pin, RS aud (Fixed) Parity - odd (default) Station address (fixed) data bits start, stop bit synchronous, Half-duplex, TE Protocol: (uto-select) K sequence (Slave only) irectnet (Slave only) Modbus (Slave only) Port Pin escriptions V Power ( ) connection (GN) V Power (+) connection RX Receive ata (RS) TX Transmit ata (RS RTS Request to Send V Power ( ) connection (GN) ommunication Port om onnects to HPP, irectsoft, operator interfaces, etc. -pin, RS ommunication speed (baud),,,,,,, Parity - odd (default), even, none Station address (default) data bits start, stop bit synchronous, Half-duplex, TE Protocol: (uto-select) K sequence (Slave only) irectnet (Master/Slave) Modbus (Master/Slave) Non-sequence/Print L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

76 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation onnecting the Programming evices If you re using a Personal omputer with the irectsoft programming package, you can connect the computer to either of the L s programming ports. For an engineering office environment (typical during program development), this is the preferred method of programming. Use cable part no. SL The Handheld programmer is connected to the PU with a handheld programmer cable. This device can be used for maintaining existing installations or making small program changes whenever a P is not available. The handheld programmer is shipped with a cable, which is approximately. feet ( cm) long. (cable comes with HPP) For replacement cable, use part # V L PU Setup Information Even if you have years of experience using PLs, there are a few things you need to do before you can start entering programs. This section includes some basic things, such as changing the PU mode, but it also includes some things that you may never have to use. Here s a brief list of the items that are discussed. Selecting and hanging the PU Modes Using uxiliary Functions learing the program (and other memory areas) How to initialize system memory Setting retentive memory ranges The following paragraphs provide the setup information necessary to get the PU ready for programming. They include setup instructions for either type of programming device you are using. The HPP Handheld Programmer Manual provides the Handheld keystrokes required to perform all of these operations. The irectsoft Programming Software User Manual provides a description of the menus and keystrokes required to perform the setup procedures. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

77 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Mode Switch Status Indicators Status Indicators The status indicator LEs on the PU front panels have specific functions which can help in programming and troubleshooting. Indicator Status Meaning PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX ON OFF ON OFF linking Power good Power failure PU is in Run Mode PU is in Stop or program Mode PU is in upgrade Mode ON PU self diagnostics error OFF PU self diagnostics good ON ata is being transmitted by the PU - Port OFF No data is being transmitted by the PU - Port ON ata is being received by the PU - Port OFF No data is being received by the PU - Port ON ata is being transmitted by the PU - Port OFF No data is being transmitted by the PU - Port ON ata is being received by the PU - Port OFF No data is being received by the PU - Port Mode Switch Functions The mode switch on the L PL provides positions for enabling and disabling program changes in the PU. Unless the mode switch is in the TERM position, RUN and STOP mode changes will not be allowed by any interface device, (handheld programmer, irectsoft programing package or operator interface). Programs may be viewed or monitored but no changes may be made. If the switch is in the TERM position and no program password is in effect, all operating modes as well as program access will be allowed through the connected programming or monitoring device. NOTE: If the L is switched to the RUN Mode without a program in the PL, the PL will produce a FTL ERROR which can be cleared by cycling power to the PL. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

78 hanging Modes in the L PL Modeswitch Position RUN (Run Program) TERM (Terminal) RUN, STOP hapter : PU Specifications and Operation There are two ways to change the PU mode. You can use the PU mode switch to select the operating mode, or you can place the mode switch in the TERM position and use a programming device to change operating modes. With the switch in this position, the PU can be changed between Run and Program modes. You can use either irectsoft or the Handheld Programmer to change the PU mode of operation. With irectsoft use the PL menu option PL > Mode or use the Mode button located on the Online toolbar. With the Handheld Programmer, you use the MOE key. PL MOE PU ction PU is forced into the RUN mode if no errors are encountered. No changes are allowed by the attached programming/monitoring device. PROGRM and the TEST modes are available. Mode and program changes are allowed by the programming/monitoring device. PU is forced into the STOP mode. No changes are allowed by the programming/monitoring device. MOE KEY Mode of Operation at Power-up The L PU will normally power-up in the mode that it was in just prior to the power interruption. For example, if the PU was in Program Mode when the power was disconnected, the PU will power-up in Program Mode (see warning note below). WRNING: Once the super capacitor has discharged, the system may not power-up in the mode it was in when this occurred. There is no way to determine which mode will be entered as the startup mode. However, the PL can power-up in either Run or Program Mode if the mode switch is in the TERM position. Failure to adhere to this warning greatly increases the risk of unexpected equipment startup. The mode which the PU will power-up in is also determined by the state of.. If the bit is set and the Mode Switch is in the TERM position, then the PU will power-up in the state it was in at power-down. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

79 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation uxiliary Functions Many PU setup tasks involve the use of uxiliary (UX) Functions. The UX Functions perform many different operations, ranging from clearing ladder memory, displaying the scan time, copying programs to EEPROM in the handheld programmer, etc. They are divided into categories that affect different system parameters. ppendix provides a description of the UX functions. You can access the UX Functions from irectsoft. or from the HPP Handheld Programmer. The manuals for those products provide step-by-step procedures for accessing the UX Functions. Some of these UX Functions are designed specifically for the Handheld Programmer setup, so they will not be needed (or available) with the irectsoft package. The following table shows a list of the uxiliary functions for the Handheld Programmer. UX * RLL Operations HSIO onfiguration heck Program Scan ontrol Setup hange Reference UX * Handheld Programmer onfiguration lear Ladder Range Show Revision Numbers lear ll Ladders eeper On / Off UX * V-Memory Operations Run Self iagnostics lear V-Memory UX * EEPROM Operations UX * I/O onfiguration opy PU memory to HPP EEPROM Show I/O onfiguration Write HPP EEPROM to PU UX * PU onfiguration ompare PU to HPP EEPROM Modify Program Name lank heck (HPP EEPROM) isplay Scan Time Erase HPP EEPROM Initialize Scratchpad Show EEPROM Type (PU and HPP) Set Watchdog Timer UX * Password Operations Set ommunication Port Modify Password Set Retentive Ranges Unlock PU Test Operations Lock PU Override Setup learing an Existing Program efore you enter a new program, be sure to always clear ladder memory. You can use UX Function to clear the complete program. You can also use other UX functions to clear other memory areas. UX lear Ladder Range UX lear all Ladders UX lear V-Memory Initializing System Memory The L Micro PL maintain system parameters in a memory area often referred to as the scratchpad. In some cases, you may make changes to the system setup that will be stored in system memory. For example, if you specify a range of ontrol Relays (Rs) as retentive, these changes are stored in system memory. UX resets the system memory to the default values. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

80 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation WRNING: You may never have to use this feature unless you want to clear any setup information that is stored in system memory. Usually, you ll only need to initialize the system memory if you are changing programs and the old program required a special system setup. You can usually load in new programs without ever initializing system memory. Remember, this UX function will reset all system memory. If you have set special parameters such as retentive ranges, etc. they will be erased when UX is used. Make sure you that you have considered all ramifications of this operation before you select it. Setting Retentive Memory Ranges The L PLs provide certain ranges of retentive memory by default. The default ranges are suitable for many applications, but you can change them if your application requires additional retentive ranges or no retentive ranges at all. ppendix F has more information pertaining to the different types of memory. The default settings are: L Memory rea efault Range vailable Range ontrol Relays V-memory V V V V Timers None by default T T ounters T T T T Stages None by default S S You can use UX to set the retentive ranges. ppendix contains detailed information about auxiliary functions. You can also set the retentive ranges by using Setup in irectsoft, PL > Setup > Retentive Ranges. WRNING: The L PLs do not have battery back-up (unless the memory cartridge, M, is installed) The super capacitor will retain the values in the event of a power loss, but only for a short period of time, depending on conditions. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

81 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Using a Password The L PLs allow you to use a password to help minimize the risk of unauthorized program and/or data changes. Once you enter a password you can lock the PL against access. Once the PU is locked you must enter the password before you can use a programming device to change any system parameters. You can select an -digit numeric password. The Micro PLs are shipped from the factory with a password of. ll zeros removes the password protection. If a password has been entered into the PU you cannot just enter all zeros to remove it. Once you enter the correct password, you can change the password to all zeros to remove the password protection. WRNING: Make sure you remember your password. If you forget your password you will not be able to access the PU. The Micro PL must be returned to the factory to have the password (along with the ladder project) cleared from memory. It is the policy of utomationirect to require the memory of the PL to be cleared along with the password. You can use the HPP Handheld Programmer or irectsoft. to enter a password. The following diagram shows how you can enter a password with the Handheld Programmer. Select UX LR LR I UX Enter the new -digit password irectsoft There are three ways to lock the PU once the password has been entered. X X X Press LR to clear the display PSSWOR PSSWOR xxxxxxxx HPP. If the PU power is disconnected, the PU will be automatically locked against access.. If you enter the password with irectsoft, the PU will be automatically locked against access when you exit irectsoft.. Use UX to lock the PU. When you use irectsoft, you will be prompted for a password if the PU has been locked. If you use the Handheld Programmer, you have to use UX to unlock the PU. Once you enter UX, you will be prompted to enter the password. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

82 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation PU Operation chieving the proper control for your equipment or process requires a good understanding of how L PUs control all aspects of system operation. There are four main areas to understand before you create your application program: PU Operating System the PU manages all aspects of system control. quick overview of all the steps is provided in the next section. PU Operating Modes The two primary modes of operation are Program Mode and Run Mode. PU Timing The two important areas we discuss are the I/O response time and the PU scan time. PU Memory Map L PUs offer a wide variety of resources, such as timers, counters, inputs, etc. The memory map section shows the organization and availability of these data types. PU Operating System t powerup, the PU initializes the internal electronic hardware. Memory initialization starts with examining the retentive memory settings. In general, the content of retentive memory is preserved, and non-retentive memory is initialized to zero (unless otherwise specified). fter the one-time powerup tasks, the PU begins the cyclical scan activity. The flowchart to the right shows how the tasks differ, based on the PU mode and the existence of any errors. The scan time is defined as the average time around the task loop. Note that the PU is always reading the inputs, even during program mode. This allows programming tools to monitor input status at any time. The outputs are only updated in Run mode. In program mode, they are in the off state. Error detection has two levels. Non-fatal errors are reported, but the PU remains in its current mode. If a fatal error occurs, the PU is forced into program mode and the outputs go off. PGM Power up Initialize hardware Initialize various memory based on retentive configuration Update input Service peripheral Update Special Relays Mode? RUN Execute program Update output o diagnostics OK? NO Report error, set flag register, turn on LE Fatal error YES Force PU into PGM mode YES NO L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

83 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Program Mode In Program Mode, the PU does not execute the application program or update the output points. The primary use for Program Mode is to enter or change an application program. You also use program mode to set up the PU parameters, such as HSIO features, retentive memory areas, etc. You can use a programming device, such as a P with irectsoft Programming Software or the HPP Handheld programmer to place the PU in Program Mode. Run Mode In Run Mode, the PU executes the application program and updates the I/O system. You can perform many operations during Run Mode. Some of these include: ownload Monitor and change I/O point status Update timer/counter preset values Update Variable memory locations Run Mode operation can be divided into several key areas. For the vast majority of applications, some of these execution segments are more important than Normal Run mode scan others. For example, you need to understand how the PU updates the I/O points, handles forcing operations, and solves the application program. The Read Inputs remaining segments are not that important for most applications. Service Peripherals You can use irectsoft or the HPP Handheld Programmer to place the PU in Run Update Special Relays Mode. You can also edit the program during Run Mode. Solve the pplication Program The Run Mode Edits are not bumpless to the outputs. Instead, the PU maintains the outputs in Write Outputs their last state while it accepts the new program information. If an error is found in the new iagnostics program, then the PU will turn all the outputs off and enter the Program Mode. This feature is discussed in more detail in hapter. WRNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the application should make changes to the program. hanges during Run Mode become effective immediately. Make sure you thoroughly consider the impact of any changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

84 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Read Inputs The PU reads the status of all inputs, then stores it in the image register. Input image register locations are designated with an X followed by a memory location. Image register data is used by the PU when it solves the application program. Of course, an input may change after the PU has just read the inputs. Generally, the PU scan time is measured in milliseconds. If you have an application that cannot wait until the next I/O update, you can use Immediate Instructions. These do not use the status of the input image register to solve the application program. The Immediate instructions immediately read the input status directly from the I/O modules. However, this lengthens the program scan since the PU has to read the I/O point status again. complete list of the Immediate instructions is included in hapter. Service Peripherals and Force I/O fter the PU reads the inputs from the input modules, it reads any attached peripheral devices. This is primarily a communications service for any attached devices. For example, it would read a programming device to see if any input, output, or other memory type status needs to be modified. There are two basic types of forcing available with the L PUs. Forcing from a peripheral not a permanent force, good only for one scan it Override holds the I/O point (or other bit) in the current state. Valid bits are X, Y,, T, T, and S. (These memory types are discussed in more detail later in this chapter). Regular Forcing This type of forcing can temporarily change the status of a discrete bit. For example, you may want to force an input on, even though it is really off. This allows you to change the point status that was stored in the image register. This value will be valid until the image register location is written to during the next scan. This is primarily useful during testing situations when you need to force a bit on to trigger another event. it Override it override can be enabled on a point-by-point basis by using UX from the Handheld Programmer or, by using the ata View option within irectsoft. it override basically disables any changes to the discrete point by the PU. For example, if you enable bit override for X, and X is off at the time, then the PU will not change the state of X. This means that even if X comes on, the PU will not acknowledge the change. So, if you used X in the program, it would always be evaluated as off in this case. Of course, if X was on when the bit override was enabled, then X would always be evaluated as on. There is an advantage available when you use the bit override feature. The regular forcing is not disabled because the bit override is enabled. For example, if you enabled the it Override for Y and it was off at the time, then the PU would not change the state of Y. However, you can still use a programming device to change the status. Now, if you use the programming device to force Y on, it will remain on and the PU will not change the state of Y. If you then force Y off, the PU will maintain Y as off. The PU will never update the point with the results from the application program or from the I/O update until the bit override is removed. The following diagram shows a brief overview of the bit override feature. Notice the PU does not update the Image Register when bit override is enabled. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

85 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation it Override OFF Input Update Force from Programmer Result of Program Solution X OFF Y OFF OFF X ON Y ON ON Image Register (example) WRNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the application should make changes to the program. Make sure you thoroughly consider the impact of any changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. Update Special Relays and Special Registers There are dedicated V-memory locations that contain Special Relays and other dedicated register information. This portion of the execution cycle makes sure these locations get updated on every scan. lso, there are several different Special Relays, such as diagnostic relays, etc., that are also updated during this segment. Solve pplication Program The PU evaluates each instruction in the application program during this segment of the scan cycle. The instructions define the relationship between the input conditions and the desired output response. The PU uses the output image register area to store the status of the desired action for the outputs. Output image register locations are designated with a Y followed by a memory Normal Run mode scan location. The actual outputs are updated during the write outputs segment of the scan cycle. There are immediate Read Inputs output instructions available that will update the output points immediately instead of waiting until the write Service Peripherals output segment. complete list of the Immediate instructions is provided in hapter. Update Special Relays The internal control relays (), the stages (S), and the variable memory (V) are also updated in this segment. Solve the pplication Program You may recall that you can force various types of points Write Outputs in the system. (This was discussed earlier in this chapter.) If any I/O points or memory data have been forced, the iagnostics output image register also contains this information. X ON Y ON OFF X OFF Y OFF OFF Input Update Force from Programmer Result of Program Solution it Override ON L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

86 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Write Outputs Once the application program has solved the instruction logic and constructed the output image register, the PU writes the contents of the output image register to the corresponding output points. Remember, the PU also made sure that any forcing operation changes were stored in the output image register, so the forced points get updated with the status specified earlier. iagnostics uring this part of the scan, the PU performs all system diagnostics and other tasks such as calculating the scan time and resetting the watchdog timer. There are many different error conditions that are automatically detected and reported by the L PLs. ppendix contains a listing of the various error codes. Probably one of the more important things that occurs during this segment is the scan time calculation and watchdog timer control. The L PU has a watchdog timer that stores the maximum time allowed for the PU to complete the solve application segment of the scan cycle. If this time is exceeded the PU will enter the Program Mode and turn off all outputs. The default value set from the factory is ms. n error is automatically reported. For example, the Handheld Programmer would display the following message E S/W TIME when the scan overrun occurs. You can use UX to view the minimum, maximum, and current scan time. Use UX to increase or decrease the watchdog timer value. I/O Response Time Is Timing Important for Your pplication? I/O response time is the amount of time required for the control system to sense a change in an input point and update a corresponding output point. In the majority of applications, the PU performs this task in such a short period of time that you may never have to concern yourself with the aspects of system timing. However, some applications do require extremely fast update times. In these cases, you may need to know how to determine the amount of time spent during the various segments of operation. There are four things that can affect the I/O response time. The point in the scan cycle when the field input changes states Input Off to On delay time PU scan time Output Off to On delay time The next paragraphs show how these items interact to affect the response time. Normal Minimum I/O Response The I/O response time is shortest when the input changes just before the Read Inputs portion of the execution cycle. In this case the input status is read, the application program is solved, and the output point gets updated. The following diagram shows an example of the timing for this situation. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

87 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Scan Field Input Input Off/On elay Output Off/On elay In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items: Input elay + Scan Time + Output elay = Response Time Normal Maximum I/O Response The I/O response time is longest when the input changes just after the Read Inputs portion of the execution cycle. In this case the new input status is not read until the following scan. Scan Field Input Input Off/On elay Output Off/On elay Solve Program Solve Program Read Inputs Read Inputs Solve Program PU Reads Inputs Scan Write Outputs I/O Response Time Scan Solve Program Write Outputs PU Writes Outputs I/O Response Time PU Reads Inputs Solve Program Solve Program The following diagram shows an example of the timing for this situation. In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items: Input elay +( x Scan Time) + Output elay = Response Time PU Writes Outputs Solve Program Solve Program L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

88 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Improving Response Time There are a few things you can do the help improve throughput. You can choose instructions with faster execution times You can use immediate I/O instructions (which update the I/O points during the program execution) You can use the HSIO Mode Pulse atch features designed to operate in high-speed environments. See ppendix E for details on using this feature. hange Mode filter to msec for X, X, X and X. Of these four things the Immediate I/O instructions are probably the most important and most useful. The following example shows how an immediate input instruction and immediate output instruction would affect the response time. Scan Field Input Input Off/On elay Output Off/On elay Solve Program Normal Read Input Read Input Immediate Scan Solve Program I/O Response Time Write Output Immediate Normal Write Outputs Solve Program In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items. Input elay + Instruction Execution Time + Output elay = Response Time Solve Program The instruction execution time would be calculated by adding the time for the immediate input instruction, the immediate output instruction, and any other instructions in between the two. NOTE: Even though the immediate instruction reads the most current status from I/O, it only uses the results to solve that one instruction. It does not use the new status to update the image register. Therefore, any regular instructions that follow will still use the image register values. ny immediate instructions that follow will access the I/O again to update the status. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

89 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation PU Scan Time onsiderations The scan time covers all the cyclical tasks that are performed by the operating system. You can use irectsoft or the Handheld Programmer to display the minimum, maximum, and current scan times that have occurred since the previous Program Mode to Run Mode transition. This information can be very important when evaluating the performance of a system. s we ve shown previously there are several segments that make up the scan cycle. Each of these segments requires a certain amount of time to complete. Of all the segments, the following are the most important. Input Update Peripheral Service Program Execution Output Update Timed Interrupt Execution The only one you really have the most control over is the amount of time it takes to execute the application program. This is because different instructions take different amounts of time to execute. So, if you think you need a faster scan, then you can try to choose faster instructions. Your choice of I/O type and peripheral devices can also affect the scan time. However, these things are usually dictated by the application. The following paragraphs provide some general information on how much time some of the segments can require. Power up Initialize hardware Initialize various memory based on retentive configuration Update input Service peripheral Reading Inputs The time required during each scan to read the input status is µs. on t confuse this with the I/O response time that was discussed earlier. Writing Outputs The time required to write the output status is µs. on t confuse this with the I/O response time that was discussed earlier. PGM Update Special Relays Mode? RUN Execute program Update output o diagnostics OK? NO Report error, set flag register, turn on LE Fatal error YES Force PU into PGM mode YES NO L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

90 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation pplication Program Execution The PU processes the program from address to the EN instruction. The PU executes the program left to right and top to bottom. s each rung is evaluated the appropriate image register or memory location is updated. The time required to solve the application program depends on the type and number of instructions used, and the amount of execution overhead. Just add the execution times for all the instructions in your program to determine to total execution time. ppendix provides a complete list of the instruction execution times for the L Micro PL. For example, the execution time for running the program shown below is calculated as follows: Instruction Time STR X OR. µs. µs NN X. µs Y. µs STRN. µs L K. µs STRN. µs V. µs STRN. µs L K. µs STRN. µs V. µs STR X. µs NN X. µs Y. µs EN. µs SUTOTL. µs Overhead L Minimum. µs Maximum. µs X X Y The program above takes only. µs to execute during each scan. The L spends. ms, on internal timed interrupt management, for every. ms of instruction time. The total scan time is calculated by adding the program execution time to the overhead (shown above) and multiplying the result (ms) by.. Overhead includes all other housekeeping and diagnostic tasks. The scan time will vary slightly from one scan to the next, because of fluctuation in overhead tasks. Program ontrol Instructions the L PLs have an interrupt routine feature that changes the way a program executes. Since this instruction interrupts normal program flow, it will have an effect on the program execution time. For example, a timed interrupt routine with a. ms period interrupts the main program execution (before the EN statement) every. ms, so the PU can execute the interrupt routine. hapter provides detailed information on interrupts. TOTL TIME = (Program execution time + Overhead) x. L K V L K V X X Y EN L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

91 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation PL Numbering Systems octal binary If you are a new PL user or are using utomationirect? PLs for the first time, please take a moment to study how??? our PLs use numbers. You ll find that each PL SII manufacturer has their own conventions on the use of hexadecimal numbers in their PLs. We want to take just a moment to? familiarize you with how numbers are used in decimal utomationirect PLs. The information you learn here? applies to all of our PLs. s any good computer does, PLs store and manipulate numbers in binary form: just ones and zeros. So why do we have to deal with numbers in so many different forms? Numbers have meaning, and some representations are more convenient than others for particular purposes. Sometimes we use numbers to represent a size or amount of something. Other numbers refer to locations or addresses, or to time. In science we attach engineering units to numbers to give a particular meaning (see ppendix I for numbering system details). PL Resources PLs offer a fixed amount of resources, depending on the model and configuration. We use the word resources to include variable memory (V-memory), I/O points, timers, counters, etc. Most modular PLs allow you to add I/O points in groups of eight. In fact, all the resources of our PLs are counted in octal. It s easier for computers to count in groups of eight than ten, because eight is an even power of. ecimal Octal means simply counting in groups of eight things at a time. In the figure to the right, there are eight circles. The quantity in decimal is, but in octal it is ( and are not valid in octal). In octal, means group of plus (no individuals). In the figure below, we have two groups of eight circles. ounting in octal we have items, meaning groups of eight, plus individuals on t say twenty, say two zero octal. This makes a clear distinction between number systems. ecimal Octal fter counting PL resources, it is time to access PL resources (there is a difference). The PU instruction set accesses resources of the PL using octal addresses. Octal addresses are the same as octal quantities, except they start counting at zero. The number zero is significant to a computer, so we don t skip it. X= Our circles are in an array of square containers to the right. To access a resource, our PL instruction X will address its location using the octal references shown. If these were counters, T would X access the black circle location. X L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. Octal

92 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation V memory Variable memory (called V-memory) stores data for the ladder program and for configuration settings. V-memory locations and V-memory addresses are the same thing, and are numbered in octal. For example, V is a valid location, while V is not valid ( and are not valid octal digits). Each V-memory location is one data word wide, meaning bits. For configuration registers, our manuals will show each bit of a V-memory word. The least significant bit (LS) will be on the right, and the most significant bit (MS) on the left. We use the word significant, referring to the relative binary weighting of the bits. V-memory data is -bit binary, but we rarely program the data registers one bit at a time. We use instructions or viewing tools that let us work with decimal, octal, and hexadecimal numbers. ll these are converted and stored as binary for us. frequently-asked question is How do I tell if a number is octal,, or hex? The answer is that we usually cannot tell just by looking at the data... but it does not really matter. What matters is: the source or mechanism which writes data into a V-memory location and the thing which later reads it must both use the same data type (i.e., octal, hex, binary, or whatever). The V-memory location is just a storage box... that s all. It does not convert or move the data on its own. inary-oded ecimal Numbers number Since humans naturally count in decimal ( fingers, toes), we prefer V-memory storage to enter and view PL data in decimal as well. However, computers are more efficient in using pure binary numbers. compromise solution between the two is inary-oded ecimal () representation. digit ranges from to, and is stored as four binary bits (a nibble). This permits each V-memory location to store four digits, with a range of decimal numbers from to. In a pure binary sense, a -bit word can represent numbers from to. In storing numbers, the range is reduced to only to. Many math instructions use inary- oded ecimal () data, and irectsoft and the handheld programmer allow us to enter and view data in. Hexadecimal Numbers Hexadecimal numbers are similar to numbers, except they utilize all possible binary values in each -bit digit. They are base- numbers so we need different digits. To extend our decimal digits through, we use through F as shown. ecimal Hexadecimal -digit hexadecimal number can represent all values in a V-memory word. The range is from to FFFF (hex). PLs often need this full range for sensor data, etc. Hexadecimal is just a convenient way for humans to view full binary data. Hexadecimal number V-memory address (octal) V MS F V-memory data (binary) LS E F V-memory storage L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

93 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Memory Map With any PL system, you generally have many different types of information to process. This includes input device status, output device status, various timing elements, parts counts, etc. It is important to understand how the system represents and stores the various types of data. For example, you need to know how the system identifies input points, output points, data words, etc. The following paragraphs discuss the various memory types used in L Micro PLs. memory map overview for the PU follows the memory descriptions. Octal Numbering System ll memory locations and resources are numbered in Octal (base ). For example, the diagram shows how the octal numbering system works for the discrete input points. Notice the octal system does not contain any numbers with the digits or. iscrete and Word Locations s you examine the different memory types, you ll notice two types of memory in the L, discrete and word memory. iscrete memory is one bit that can be either a or a. Word memory is referred to as V-memory (variable) and is a -bit location normally used to manipulate data/numbers, store data/numbers, etc. Some information is automatically stored in V-memory. For example, the timer current values are stored in V-memory. X X X X X X X X iscrete On or Off, bit X Word Locations bits V-memory Locations for iscrete Memory reas The discrete memory area is for inputs, outputs, control relays, special relays, stages, timer status bits and counter status bits. However, you can also access the bit data types as a V- memory word. Each V-memory location contains consecutive discrete locations. For example, the following diagram shows how the X input points are mapped into V-memory locations. iscrete (X) Input Points X it # V These discrete memory areas and their corresponding V-memory ranges are listed in the memory area table for L Micro PLs on the following pages. X X X X X X X L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

94 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Input Points (X ata Type) The discrete input points are noted by an X data type. There are discrete input points and discrete input addresses available with L PUs. In this example, the output point Y will be turned on when input X energizes. Output Points (Y ata Type) The discrete output points are noted by a Y data type. There are discrete outputs and discrete output addresses available with L PUs. In this example, output point Y will be turned on when input X energizes. ontrol Relays ( ata Type) ontrol relays are discrete bits normally used to control the user program. The control relays do not represent a real world device, that is, they cannot be physically tied to switches, output coils, etc. They are internal to the PU. ecause of this, control relays can be programmed as discrete inputs or discrete outputs. These locations are used in programming the discrete memory locations () or the corresponding word location which contains consecutive discrete locations. In this example, memory location will energize when input X turns on. The second rung shows a simple example of how to use a control relay as an input. Timers and Timer Status its (T ata Type) Timer status bits reflect the relationship between the current value and the preset value of a specified timer. The timer status bit will be on when the current value is equal or greater than the preset value of a corresponding timer. When input X turns on, timer T will start. When the timer reaches the preset of seconds (K) timer status contact T turns on. When T turns on, output Y turns on. Turning off X resets the timer. X X X X T TMR K Y Y Y Y T Y L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

95 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Timer urrent Values (V ata Type) s mentioned earlier, some information is automatically stored in V-memory. This is true for the current values associated with timers. For example, V holds the current value for Timer, V holds the current value for Timer, etc. The primary reason for this is programming flexibility. The example shows how you can use relational contacts to monitor several time intervals from a single timer. ounters and ounter Status its (T ata type) ounter status bits that reflect the relationship between the current value and the preset value of a specified counter. The counter status bit will be on when the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value of a corresponding counter. Each time contact X transitions from off to on, the counter increments by one. (If X comes on, the counter is reset to zero.) When the counter reaches the preset of counts (K of ) counter status contact T turns on. When T turns on, output Y turns on. ounter urrent Values (V ata Type) Just like the timers, the counter current values are also automatically stored in V-memory. For example, V holds the current value for ounter T, V holds the current value for ounter T, etc. The primary reason for this is programming flexibility. The example shows how you can use relational contacts to monitor the counter values. X TMR T K V K Y V K Y V K V K Y X X T X X NT T K Y NT T K V K Y V K Y V K V K Y L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

96 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Word Memory (V ata Type) Word memory is referred to as V-memory (variable) and is a -bit location normally used to manipulate data/numbers, store data/numbers, etc. Some information is automatically stored in V-memory. For example, the timer current values are stored in V-memory. The example shows how a fourdigit constant is loaded into the accumulator and then stored in a V-memory location. Stages (S ata type) Stages are used in RLL PLUS programs to create a structured program, similar to a flowchart. Each program Stage denotes a program segment. When the program segment, or Stage, is active, the logic within that segment is executed. If the Stage is off, or inactive, the logic is not executed and the PU skips to the next active Stage. (See hapter for a more detailed description of RLL PLUS programming.) Each Stage also has a discrete status bit that can be used as an input to indicate whether the Stage is active or inactive. If the Stage is active, then the status bit is on. If the Stage is inactive, then the status bit is off. This status bit can also be turned on or off by other instructions, such as the SET or RESET instructions. This allows you to easily control stages throughout the program. Special Relays (SP ata Type) Special relays are discrete memory locations with pre-defined functionality. There are many different types of special relays. For example, some aid in program development, others provide system operating status information, etc. ppendix provides a complete listing of the special relays. In this example, control relay will energize for ms and de-energize for ms because SP is a pre defined relay that will be on for ms and off for ms. X L K V Word Locations bits Ladder Representation ISG S SG S SG S Start X Part Present X Part Present X Part Locked X SP Wait for Start heck for a Part lamp the part SP: second clock SP: ms clock SP: ms clock S JMP S JMP S JMP S JMP lamp SET S S JMP L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

97 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation L System V-memory System Parameters and efault ata Locations (V ata Type) The L PLs reserve several V-memory locations for storing system parameters or certain types of system data. These memory locations store things like the error codes, High-Speed I/O data, and other types of system setup information. System V-memory escription of ontents efault Values/Ranges V V The default location for multiple preset values for the High-Speed ounter N/ V V Locations for V operator interface parameters V Sets the V-memory location that contains the value V V V Sets the V-memory location that contains the message V V V Sets the total number ( ) of V-memory locations to be displayed. V Sets the V-memory location containing the numbers to be displayed. V V V Sets the V-memory location containing the character code to be displayed V V V ontains the function number that can be assigned to each key. V-memory location for X, Y, or points used V Power-up operational mode.,,,, V hange preset value. to V Starting location for the multi step presets for channel. The default value is, which indicates the first value should be obtained from V. Since there efault: V Range: are presets available, the default range is V V. You can change the starting point if necessary. V V V V Reserved N/ V Sets the desired function code for the high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train, and input filter. Location can also be used to set the power-up in Run Mode option. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. efault: Lower yte Range: Range: ounter Quadrature Pulse Out Interrupt Pulse atch Filtered discrete In. Upper yte Range: its,, : Unused it : Power up in RUN, if Mode Switch is in TERM position. V - X V - X V - X V Setup Registers for High-Speed I/O functions Pulse/irection efault: efault: V V Reserved N/ V Timed Interrupt efault: Range: Eh ( ms) V V Reserved N/ V Port : Setup for the protocol, time-out, and the response delay time. efault: E V Port : Setup for the station number, baud rate, STOP bit, and parity. efault:

98 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation System V-memory escription of ontents efault Values/Ranges V Port : Setup completion code used to notify the completion of the parameter setup efault: V Scan control setup: Keeps the scan control mode efault: V Setup timer over counter: ounts the times the actual scan time exceeds the user setup time V V Reserved V V Locations for V operator interface parameters V Titled Timer preset value pointer V Title ounter preset value pointer V Hiyte-Titled Timer preset block size, Loyte-Titled ounter preset block size V V Reserved V Fault Message Error ode stores the -digit code used with the FULT instruction when the instruction is executed V V Reserved V Error code stores the fatal error code V Error code stores the major error code V Error code stores the minor error code V V Reserved V Program address where syntax error exists N/ V Syntax error code V Scan stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition V ontains the number of seconds on optional Memory artridge clock (-) V ontains the number of minutes on optional Memory artridge clock (-) V ontains the number of hours on optional Memory artridge clock (-) V ontains the day of week on optional Memory artridge (Mon., Tues., Wed., etc.) V ontains the numerical day of month on optional Memory artridge (,, etc.) V ontains the numerical month on optional Memory artridge ( to ) V ontains the year on optional Memory artridge ( to ) V Scan stores the current scan time (milliseconds) V Scan stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition (milliseconds) V Scan stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition (milliseconds) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

99 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation L Memory Map Table iscrete Memory Memory Type Reference (octal) Input Points (See note) Output Points (See note) Word Memory Reference (octal) ecimal X X V - V Y Y V V ontrol Relays V - V Special Relays SP SP V V Symbol Timers T T V V TMR T K Timer urrent Values None V V Timer Status its T T V V ounters T T V V ounter urrent Values None V V ounter Status its T T V V ata Words (See ppendix F) ata Words Non-volatile (See ppendix F) None V V None V V Stages S S V V NOTE: The L has discrete inputs and discrete outputs which are standard. The number of inputs and/or outputs can be increased by adding one of the available option modules. Refer to either the L/ Option Modules User Manual (-OPTIONS-M), our catalog or our website. V X Y SP T K NT T K V T K None specific, used with many instructions. None specific, used with many instructions. May be non-volatile if MOV inst. is used. ata can be rewritten to EEPROM at least, times before it fails. SG S System parameters None V V None specific, used for various purposes SP L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

100 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation L liases n alias is an alternate way of referring to certain memory types, such as timer/counter current values, V-memory locations for I/O points, etc., which simplifies understanding the memory address. The use of the alias is optional, but some users may find the alias to be helpful when developing a program. The table below shows how the aliases can be used. L liases ddress Start lias Start Example V T V is the timer accumulator value for timer ; therefore, its alias is T. T is the alias for V, etc. V T V is the counter accumulator value for counter ; therefore, its alias is T. T is the alias for V, etc. V VX V is the word memory reference for discrete bits X through X; therefore, its alias is VX. V is the word memory reference for discrete bits X through X; therefore, its alias is VX. V VY V is the word memory reference for discrete bits Y through Y; therefore, its alias is VY. V is the word memory reference for discrete bits Y through Y; therefore, its alias is VY. V V V is the word memory reference for discrete bits through ; therefore, its alias is V. V is the word memory reference for discrete bits through ; therefore, its alias is V. V VS V is the word memory reference for discrete bits S through S; therefore, its alias is VS. V is the word memory reference for discrete bits S through S; therefore, its alias is VS. V VT V is the word memory reference for discrete bits T through T; therefore, its alias is VT. V is the word memory reference for discrete bits T through T; therefore, its alias is VT. V VT V is the word memory reference for discrete bits T through T; therefore, its alias is VT. V is the word memory reference for discrete bits T through T; therefore, its alias is VT. V VSP V is the word memory reference for discrete bits SP through SP; therefore, its alias is VSP. V is the word memory reference for discrete bits SP through SP; therefore, its alias is VSP. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

101 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation X Input it Map This table provides a listing of individual Input points associated with each V-memory address bit for the L s eight physical inputs. ctual available references are X to X (V V). MS L Input (X) Points ddress V This table provides the listing for the individual option slot Input points available. MS L Option Slot Input (X) Points ddress V Y Output it Map This table provides a listing of individual output points associated with each V-memory address bit for the L s six physical outputs. ctual available references are Y to Y (V V). MS L Output (Y) Points LS ddress V This table provides the listing for the individual option slot Output points available. MS L Option Slot Output (Y) Points LS ddress V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

102 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation ontrol Relay it Map This table provides a listing of the individual control relays associated with each V-memory address bit MS L ontrol Relays () LS ddress V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

103 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Stage ontrol/status it Map This table provides a listing of individual Stage control bits associated with each V-memory address bit. MS L Stage (S) ontrol its LS ddress V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V Timer Status it Map This table provides a listing of individual timer contacts associated with each V-memory address bit. MS L Timer (T) ontacts LS ddress V V V V V V V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

104 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation ounter Status it Map This table provides a listing of individual counter contacts associated with each V-memory address bit. MS L ounter (T) ontacts LS ddress V V V V V V V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

105 hapter : PU Specifications and Operation Notes L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

106 ONFIGURTION N ONNETIONS HPTER HPTER In This hapter: L System esign Strategies Network onfiguration and onnections Network Slave Operation Network Master Operation

107 hapter : onfiguration and onnections L System esign Strategies I/O System onfigurations The L PLs offer a number of different I/O configurations. hoose the configuration that is right for your application, and keep in mind that the L PLs offer the ability to add an I/O card in the option slot. lthough remote I/O isn t available, there are several option cards available. For instance: Various / and / I/O modules ombination I/O modules nalog I/O modules ombination nalog I/O modules L system can be developed with an arrangement using a selected option modules. See our L/ Options Modules User Manual (-OPTIONS-M) on the website, for detailed selection information. Networking onfigurations The L PLs offers the following ways to add networking: Ethernet ommunications Module connects a L to high-speed peer-to-peer networks. ny PL can initiate communications with any other PL or operator interfaces, such as -more, when using the EOM modules. ata ommunications Modules connects a L to devices using either evicenet or Profibus to link to master controllers, as well as a -M. ommunications Port The L has a -pin RJ connector on Port that supports (as slave) K-sequence, Modbus RTU or irectnet protocols. ommunications Port The L has a -pin RJ connector on Port that supports either master/slave Modbus RTU or irectnet protocols, or K-sequence protocol as slave. Port can also be used for SII communications. PWR RUN PU TX RX TX RX Option Slot L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

108 hapter : onfiguration and onnections utomatic I/O onfiguration The L PUs will automatically detect the optional I/O module, if installed, at powerup and establish the correct I/O configuration and addresses. The configuration may never need to be changed. The I/O addresses use octal numbering, with X to X being the eight inputs and Y to Y being the addresses for the six outputs. The discrete option slot addresses are assigned in groups of or depending on the number of I/O points for the I/O module. The discrete option module addressing will be X to X and X to X for the maximum sixteen point input module. The addressing for the sixteen point output module will be Y to Y and Y to Y. Refer to the L/ Options Modules User Manual (- OPTIONS-M) for the various discrete I/O modules available and the addressing for each one. Power udgeting No power budgeting is necessary for the L. The built-in power supply is sufficient for powering the base unit, your choice of option module, the handheld programmer and the V- operator interface. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

109 hapter : onfiguration and onnections Network onfiguration and onnections onfiguring the L s omm Ports This section describes how to configure the PU s built-in networking ports for either Modbus or irectnet. This will allow you to connect the L PL system directly to Modbus networks using the RTU protocol, or to other devices on a irectnet network. Modbus host systems must be capable of issuing the Modbus commands to read or write the appropriate data. For details on the Modbus protocol, check with your Modbus supplier for the latest version of the Gould Modbus Protocol reference Guide. For more details on irectnet, order our irectnet manual, part number NET M. L Port Specifications ommunications Port onnects to HPP, irectsoft, operator interfaces, etc. -pin, RS ommunication speed: aud (fixed) Parity: odd (fixed) Port Station ddress: (fixed) data bits start, stop bit synchronous, half-duplex, TE Protocol (auto-select): K-sequence (slave only), irectnet (slave only), Modbus (slave only) Port Pin escriptions V Power ( ) connection (GN) V Power (+) connection RX Receive ata (RS) TX Transmit ata (RS V Power (+) connection V Power ( ) connection (GN) Port Pin escriptions V Power ( ) connection (GN) V Power (+) connection RX Receive ata (RS) TX Transmit ata (RS RTS Request to Send V Power ( ) connection (GN) Networking L to L RS- You will need to make sure the network connection is a -wire RS type. The recommended cable is elden or equivalent. Normally, the RS signals are used for communications between two devices with distances up to a maximum of meters. L PORT V V RX RX TX TX ommunications Port onnects to HPP, irectsoft, operator interfaces, etc. -pin, multifunction port, RS ommunication speed (baud):,,,,,,, Parity: odd (default), even, none Port Station ddress: (default) data bits start, stop bit synchronous, half-duplex, TE Protocol (auto-select): K-sequence (slave only), irectnet (master/slave), Modbus (master/slave), non-sequence/print L PORT or L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

110 hapter : onfiguration and onnections Networking P to Ls RS and to Other PLs Networking P to Ls RS Networking L Master to Other PLs V V RX RX TX TX RTS RTS F ISOON GN TX+ TX RX RX+ Note: When using the L on a multi-drop network, the RTS ON elay time must be set to at least ms and the RTS OFF elay time must be set to at least ms. If you encounter problems, the time can be increased. L PORT or V V or RX RX TX TX TS V V RTS F ISOON GN TX+ TX RX RX+ -pin Female Modular onnector The recommended cable for RS- is elden or equivalent. The maximum cable distance is meters. F-ISOON GN RX+ RX TX TX+ F-ISOON GN RX+ RX TX TX+ F-ISOON GN RX+ RX TX TX+ F-ISOON GN RX+ RX TX TX+ L or V V or PORT RX TX TS V RX TX V RTS L or V V or PORT RX RX TX TX TS V V RTS L or V V or PORT RX RX TX TX TS V V RTS L V V PORT RX RX TX TX TS V V RTS L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

111 hapter : onfiguration and onnections Modbus Port onfiguration In irectsoft, choose the PL menu, then Setup, then Secondary omm Port. Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose Port. Protocol: lick the check box to the left of Modbus (use UX on the HPP, and select MUS ), and then you ll see the dialog box below. Timeout: mount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before logging an error. RTS ON / OFF elay Time: The RTS ON elay Time specifies the time the L waits to send the data after it has raised the RTS signal line. The RTS OFF elay Time specifies the time the L waits to release the RTS signal line after the data has been sent. When using the L on a multi-drop network, the RTS ON elay time must be set to at least ms and the RTS OFF elay time must be set to at least ms. If you encounter problems, the time can be increased. Station Number: The possible range for Modbus slave numbers is from to, but the L network instructions used in Master mode will access only slaves to. Each slave must have a unique number. t powerup, the port is automatically a slave, unless and until the L executes ladder logic network instructions which use the port as a master. Thereafter, the port reverts back to slave mode until ladder logic uses the port again. aud Rate: The available baud rates include,,,,,,, and baud. hoose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates of all devices on the network to the same value. Refer to the appropriate product manual for details. Stop its: hoose or stop bits for use in the protocol. Parity: hoose none, even, or odd parity for error checking. Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the PU, and click lose. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

112 hapter : onfiguration and onnections irectnet Port onfiguration In irectsoft, choose the PL menu, then Setup, then Secondary omm Port. Port: From the port number list box, choose Port. Protocol: lick the check box to the left of irectnet (use UX on the HPP, then select NET ), and then you ll see the dialog box below. Timeout: mount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before logging an error. RTS ON / OFF elay Time: The RTS ON elay Time specifies the time the L waits to send the data after it has raised the RTS signal line. The RTS OFF elay Time specifies the time the L waits to release the RTS signal line after the data has been sent. When using the L on a multi-drop network, the RTS ON elay time must be set to at least ms and the RTS OFF elay time must be set to at least ms. If you encounter problems, the time can be increased. Station Number: For making the PU port a irectnet master, choose. The allowable range for irectnet slaves is from to (each slave must have a unique number). t powerup, the port is automatically a slave, unless and until the L executes ladder logic instructions which attempt to use the port as a master. Thereafter, the port reverts back to slave mode until ladder logic uses the port again. aud Rate: The available baud rates include,,,,,,, and baud. hoose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates of all devices on the network to the same value. Stop its: hoose or stop bits for use in the protocol. Parity: hoose none, even, or odd parity for error checking. Format: hoose between hex or SII formats. Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the PU, and click lose. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

113 hapter : onfiguration and onnections Network Slave Operation This section describes how other devices on a network can communicate with a PU port that you have configured as a irectnetslave or Modbus slave (L). Modbus host must use the Modbus RTU protocol to communicate with the L as a slave. The host software must send a Modbus function code and Modbus address to specify a PL memory location the L comprehends. The irectnet host uses normal I/O addresses to access applicable L PU and system. No PU ladder logic is required to support either Modbus slave or irectnet slave operation. Modbus Function odes Supported The Modbus function code determines whether the access is a read or a write, and whether to access a single data point or a group of them. The L supports the Modbus function codes described below. MOUS Function ode Function L ata Types vailable Read a group of coils Y, R, T, T Read a group of inputs X, SP Set / Reset a single coil Y, R, T, T Set / Reset a group of coils Y, R, T, T, Read a value from one or more registers V Write a value into a single register V Write a value into a group of registers V etermining the Modbus ddress There are typically two ways that most host software conventions allow you to specify a PL memory location. These are: y specifying the Modbus data type and address y specifying a Modbus address only NOTE: For information about the Modbus protocol see the Group Schneider website at: t the main menu, select Support/Services, Modbus, Modbus Technical Manuals, PI-MUS- Modbus Protocol Reference Guide or search for PIMUS. For more information about the irectnet protocol, order our irectnet User Manual, -NET-M, or download the manual free from our website: Select Manuals\ocs\onlineusermanuals\misc.\-NET-M L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

114 hapter : onfiguration and onnections If Your Host Software Requires the ata Type and ddress... Many host software packages allow you to specify the Modbus data type and the Modbus address that corresponds to the PL memory location. This is the easiest method, but not all packages allow you to do it this way. The actual equation used to calculate the address depends on the type of PL data you are using. The PL memory types are split into two categories for this purpose. iscrete X, SP, Y, R, S, T, (contacts) Word V, Timer current value, ounter current value In either case, you basically convert the PL octal address to decimal and add the appropriate Modbus address (if required). The table below shows the exact equation used for each group of data. L Memory Type QTY (ec.) PL Range(Octal Modbus ddress Range (ecimal) Modbus ata Type For iscrete ata Types... onvert PL ddr. to ec. + Start of Range + ata Type Inputs (X) X X Input Special Relays(SP) SP SP Input Outputs (Y) Y Y oil ontrol Relays (R) oil Timer ontacts (T) T T oil ounter ontacts (T) T T oil Stage Status its(s) S S oil For Word ata Types... onvert PL ddr. to ec. + ata Type Timer urrent Values (V) V V Input Register ounter urrent Values (V) V V Input Register V-Memory, user data (V) V V Holding Register V-Memory, non-volatile (V) V V Holding Register L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

115 hapter : onfiguration and onnections The following examples show how to generate the Modbus address and data type for hosts which require this format. PL ddress (ec) + ata Type Example : V V = decimal Find the Modbus address for User V location V. + Hold. Reg. = Holding Reg. Find V memory in the table.. onvert V into decimal ().. Use the Modbus data type from the table. V Memory, user data (V) V V Holding Register Example : Y Find the Modbus address for output Y.. Find Y outputs in the table.. onvert Y into decimal ().. dd the starting address for the range ().. Use the Modbus data type from the table. Example : T urrent Value Outputs (V) Y Y - oil Find the Modbus address to obtain the current value from Timer T.. Find Timer urrent Values in the table.. onvert T into decimal ().. Use the Modbus data type from the table. Example : PL ddress (ec) + Start ddr + ata Type Y = decimal + + oil = oil PL ddress (ec) + ata Type T = decimal + Input Reg. = Input Reg. Timer urrent Values (V) V V - Input Register Find the Modbus address for ontrol Relay.. Find ontrol Relays in the table.. onvert into decimal (). PL ddress (ec) + Start ddr. + ata Type = decimal. dd the starting address for the range ().. Use the Modbus data type from the table. + + oil = oil ontrol Relays (R) oil L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

116 hapter : onfiguration and onnections If Your Modbus Host Software Requires an ddress ONLY Some host software does not allow you to specify the Modbus data type and address. Instead, you specify an address only. This method requires another step to determine the address, but it s still fairly simple. asically, Modbus also separates the data types by address ranges as well. So this means an address alone can actually describe the type of data and location. This is often referred to as adding the offset. One important thing to remember here is that two different addressing modes may be available in your host software package. These are: Mode / Mode We recommend that you use the / addressing mode if your host software allows you to choose. This is because the / mode allows access to a higher number of memory locations within each data type. If your software only supports mode, then there may be some PL memory locations that will be unavailable. The actual equation used to calculate the address depends on the type of PL data you are using. The PL memory types are split into two categories for this purpose. iscrete X, SP, Y, R, S, T (contacts), (contacts) Word V, Timer current value, ounter current value In either case, you basically convert the PL octal address to decimal and add the appropriate Modbus addresses (as required). The table below shows the exact equation used for each group of data. iscrete ata Types L Memory Type PL Range (Octal) ddress ( Mode) ddress (/ Mode) Modbus ata Type Global Inputs (GX) GX-GX - - Input GX-GX Input Inputs (X) X X Input Special Relays (SP) SP SP Input Global Outputs (GY) GY - GY - - Output Outputs (Y) Y Y - - Output ontrol Relays (R) - - Output Timer ontacts (T) T T - - Output ounter ontacts (T) T T - - Output Stage Status its (S) S S - - Output L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

117 hapter : onfiguration and onnections Word ata Types Registers PL Range (Octal) Input/Holding ( Mode)* Input/Holding (/ Mode)* V-Memory (Timers) V - V / / V-Memory (ounters) V - V / / V - V / / V - V / / V-Memory (ata Words) V - V --- / V - V --- V - V --- * Modbus: Function The L/, L-/, L and L will support function, read input register (ddress ). To use function, put the number into the most significant position (xxx). Four digits must be entered for the instruction to work properly with this mode. L K L K L O RX Y The Maximum constant possible is. This is due to the maximum number of ytes that the RX/WX instruction can allow. The value of in the most significant position of the word will cause the RX to use function ( range).. Refer to your PL user manual for the correct memory mapping size of your PL. Some of the addresses shown above might not pertain to your particular PU.. For an automated Modbus/Koyo address conversion utility, download the file modbus_conversion.xls from the website. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

118 hapter : onfiguration and onnections Example : V / Mode Find the Modbus address for user V-memory V.. Find V memory in the table.. onvert V into decimal ().. dd the Modbus starting address for the mode (). Example : Y / Mode Find the Modbus address for output Y.. Find Y outputs in the table.. onvert Y into decimal ().. dd the starting address for the range ().. dd the Modbus address for the mode (). Example : T urrent Value Mode Find the Modbus address to obtain the current value for Timer T.. Find Timer urrent Values in the table.. onvert T into decimal ().. dd the Modbus starting address for the mode (). + = For Word ata Types... PL ddress (ec.) + ppropriate Mode ddress Timer urrent Values (V) V V Input Register ounter urrent Values (V) V V Input Register V-Memory, user data (V) V V Holding Register Example : / Mode Find the Modbus address for ontrol Relay.. Find ontrol Relays in the table.. onvert into decimal ().. dd the starting address for the range ().. dd the Modbus address for the mode (). PL ddress (ec) + Mode ddress V = decimal + = For Word ata Types... PL ddress (ec.) + ppropriate Mode ddress Timer urrent Values (V) V V Input Register ounter urrent Values (V) V V Input Register V-Memory, user data (V) V V Holding Register PL ddress (ec) + Start ddr + Mode Y = decimal + + = Outputs (Y) Y - Y - oil ontrol Relays (R) - - oil Timer ontacts (T) T - T - oil PL ddress (ec) + Mode ddress T = decimal PL ddress (ec) + Start ddr + Mode = decimal + + = Outputs (Y) Y - Y - oil ontrol Relays (R) - - oil Timer ontacts (T) T - T - oil L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

119 hapter : onfiguration and onnections Network Master Operation This section describes how the L PL can communicate on a Modbus or irectnet network as a master. For Modbus networks, it uses the Modbus RTU protocol, which must be interpreted by all the slaves on the network. oth Modbus and irectnet are single master/multiple slave networks. The master is the only member of the network that can initiate requests on the network. This section teaches you how to design the required ladder logic for network master operation. Master F-ISOON Slave # Slave # Slave # When using the L PL as the master station, simple RLL instructions are used to initiate the requests. The WX instruction initiates network write operations, and the RX instruction initiates network read operations. efore executing either the WX or RX commands, we will need to load data related to the read or write operation onto the PU s accumulator stack. When the WX or RX instruction executes, it uses the information on the stack combined with data in the instruction box to completely define the task, which goes to the port. Master Modbus RTU Protocol, or irectnet Network WX (write) RX (read) The following step-by-step procedure will provide you the information necessary to set up your ladder program to receive data from a network slave. Slave L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

120 hapter : onfiguration and onnections Step : Identify Master Port # and Slave # The first Load (L) instruction identifies the communications port number on the network master (L) and the address of the slave station. This instruction can address up to Modbus slaves, or irectnet slaves. The format of the word is shown to the right. The F in the upper byte indicates the use of the right port of the L PL, port number. The lower byte contains the slave address number in ( to ). Step : Load Number of ytes to Transfer The second Load (L) instruction determines the number of bytes which will be transferred between the master and slave in the subsequent WX or RX instruction. The value to be loaded is in format (decimal), from to bytes. The number of bytes specified also depends on the type of data you want to obtain. For example, the L Input points can be accessed by V- memory locations or as X input locations. However, if you only want X X, you ll have to use the X input data type because the V- memory locations can only be accessed in -byte increments. The following table shows the byte ranges for the various types of irectlogi products. L /// Memory its per unit ytes V-memory T / current value Inputs (X, SP) Outputs (Y,, Stage, T/ bits) Scratch Pad Memory iagnostic Status L/ Memory its per unit ytes ata registers T / accumulator I/O, internal relays, shift register bits, T/ bits, stage bits Scratch Pad Memory iagnostic Status( word R/W) F Slave address () Port number () Internal port (hex) L KF () # of bytes to transfer L K L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

121 hapter : onfiguration and onnections Step : Specify Master Memory rea The third instruction in the RX or WX sequence is a Load ddress (L) instruction. Its purpose is to load the starting address of the memory area to be transferred. Entered as an octal number, the L instruction converts it to hex and places the result in the accumulator. For a WX instruction, the L PU sends the number of bytes previously specified from its memory area beginning at the L address specified. For an RX instruction, the L PU reads the number of bytes previously specified from the slave, placing the received data into its memory area beginning at the L address specified. NOTE: Since V-memory words are always bits, you may not always use the whole word. For example, if you only specify bytes and you are reading Y outputs from the slave, you will only get bits of data. In this case, only the least significant bits of the last word location will be modified. The remaining bits are not affected. Step : Specify Slave Memory rea The last instruction in our sequence is the WX or RX instruction itself. Use WX to write to the slave, and RX to read from the slave. ll four of our instructions are shown to the right. In the last instruction, you must specify the starting address and a valid data type for the slave. irectnet slaves specify the same address in the WX and RX instruction as the slave s native I/O address Modbus L, L, or L slaves specify the same address in the WX and RX instruction as the slave s native I/O address Modbus slaves use the following table to convert L addresses to Modbus addresses MS MS (octal) SP Starting address of master transfer area V V L O L KF L Series PU Memory Type to Modbus ross Reference (excluding PU) PL Memory Type PL ase ddress Modbus ase ddress PL Memory Type PL ase ddress Modbus ase ddress TMR/NT urrent Values R V TMR/NT Status its T GY I/O Points IO GY ontrol Relays R GY ata Registers R,R V Shift Registers SR GY Stage Status its (-P only) S GY L K LS LS L O RX Y L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

122 hapter : onfiguration and onnections ommunications from a Ladder Program Typically network communications will last longer than scan. The program must wait for the communications to finish before starting the next transaction. Port, which can be a master, has two Special Relay contacts associated with it (see ppendix for comm port special relays). One indicates Port busy (SP), and the other indicates Port ommunication Error (SP). The example above shows the use of these contacts for a network master that only reads a device (RX). The Port usy bit is on while the PL communicates with the slave. When the bit is off the program can initiate the next network request. The Port ommunication Error bit turns on when the PL has detected an error. Use of this bit is optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit is reset when an RX or WX instruction is executed. Multiple Read and Write Interlocks If you are using multiple reads and writes in the RLL program, you have to interlock the routines to make sure all the routines are executed. If you don t use the interlocks, then the PU will only execute the first routine. This is because each port can only handle one transaction at a time. In the example to the right, after the RX instruction is executed, is set. When the port has finished the communication task, the second routine is executed and is reset. Port ommunication Error SP SP SP Interlocking Relay SP Port usy L KF L K L O RX Y Interlocking Relay L KF L K L O RX VX L KF L K Y SET SET L O WX VY RST L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

123 hapter : onfiguration and onnections Notes L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

124 HPTER STNR RLL N INTELLIG OX INSTRUTIONS In This hapter: Introduction Using oolean Instructions oolean Instructions omparative oolean Immediate Instructions Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions Logical Instructions (ccumulator) Math Instructions it Operation Instructions Number onversion Instructions (ccumulator) Table Instructions PU ontrol Instructions Program ontrol Instructions Interrupt Instructions Message Instructions Intelligent I/O Instructions Network Instructions Intelligent ox (Iox) Instructions

125 hapter : Standard RLL Instructions Introduction L Micro PLs offer a wide variety of instructions to perform many different types of operations. This chapter shows you how to use each standard Relay Ladder Logic (RLL) instruction. In addition to these instructions, you may also need to refer to the rum instruction in hapter, or the Stage programming instructions in hapter. There are two ways to quickly find the instruction you need. If you know the instruction category (oolean, omparative oolean, etc.) just use the title at the top of the page to find the pages that discuss the instructions in that category. If you know the individual instruction name, use the following table to find the page(s) that discusses the instruction. Instruction Page Instruction Page ccumulating Timer (TMR) ccumulating Fast Timer (TMRF) - dd () dd inary () dd ouble () nd (N) nd (N) nd (N) nd it-of-word (N) - nd ouble (N) nd If Equal (NE) nd If Not Equal (NNE) nd Immediate (NI) nd Negative ifferential (NN) nd Not (NN) nd Not (NN) nd Not it-of-word (NN) - nd Not Immediate (NNI) nd Positive ifferential (NP) nd Store (N STR) SII onstant (ON) SII to HEX (TH) inary (IN) inary oded ecimal () ompare (MP) ompare ouble (MP) ounter (NT) ata Label (LL) ecode (EO) ecrement (E) ecrement inary (E) isable Interrupts (ISI) ivide (IV) ivide inary (IV) ivide ouble (IV) Enable Interrupts (ENI) Encode (ENO) End (EN) Exclusive Or (XOR) Exclusive Or ouble (XOR) Fault (FULT) For / Next (FOR) (NEXT) Goto Subroutine (GTS) (SR) Gray ode (GRY) HEX to SII (HT) Increment (IN) Increment inary (IN) Interrupt (INT) Interrupt Return (IRT) Interrupt Return onditional (IRT) Invert (INV) Load (L) Load ddress (L) Load ouble (L) Load Formatted (LF) Load Label (LLL) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

126 hapter : Standard RLL Instructions Instruction Page Instruction Page Master Line Reset (MLR) Reset it-of-word (RST) - Master Line Set (MLS) Reset Immediate (RSTI) Move (MOV) Reset Watch og Timer (RSTWT) Move Memory artridge (MOVM) Set (SET) Multiply (MUL) Set it-of-word (SET) - Multiply inary (MUL) Set Immediate (SETI) Multiply ouble (MUL) Shift Left (SHFL) No Operation (NOP) Shift Register (SR) Not (NOT) Shift Right (SHFR) Numerical onstant (NON) Shuffle igits (SFLGT) Or (OR) Stage ounter (SGNT) Or (OR) Stop (STOP) Or (OR) Store (STR) Or it-of-word (OR) - Store (STR) - Or ouble (OR) Store it-of-word (STR) - Or If Equal (ORE) Store If Equal (STRE) Or If Not Equal (ORNE) Store If Not Equal (STRNE) Or Immediate (ORI) Store Immediate (STRI) Or Negative ifferential (ORN) Store Negative ifferential (STRN) Or Not (ORN) Store Not (STRN) Or Not (ORN) Store Not (STRN) - Or Not it-of-word (ORN) - Store Not it-of-word (STRN) - Or Not Immediate (ORNI) Store Not Immediate (STRNI) Or Out (OR ) Store Positive ifferential (STRP) Or Out Immediate (ORI) Subroutine Return (RT) Or Positive ifferential (ORP) Subroutine Return onditional (RT) Or Store (OR STR) Subtract (SU) Out () Subtract inary (SU) Out () Subtract ouble (SU) Out it-of-word () - Sum (SUM) Out ouble () Timer (TMR) and Timer Fast (TMRF) Out Formatted (F) Up own ounter (U) Out Immediate (I) Write to Intelligent ox I/O Module (WT) - Pause (PUSE) Write to Network (WX) Pop (POP) Positive ifferential (P) Print Message (PRINT) Read from Intelligent ox I/O Module (R) - Read from Network (RX) Reset (RST) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

127 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions Using oolean Instructions o you ever wonder why so many PL manufacturers always quote the scan time for a K oolean program? Simple. Most all programs utilize many oolean instructions. These are typically very simple instructions designed to join input and output contacts in various series and parallel combinations. Our irectsoft software is a similar program. It uses graphic symbols to develop a program; therefore, you don't necessarily have to know the instruction mnemonics in order to develop your program. However, knowledge of mnemonics will be helpful, whenever it becomes necessary to troubleshoot a program using a handheld programmer (HPP). Many of the instructions in this chapter are not program instructions used in irectsoft, but are implied. In other words, they are not actually keyboard commands, however, they can be seen in a Mnemonic View of the program once the irectsoft program has been developed and accepted (compiled). Each instruction listed in this chapter will have a small chart to indicate how the instruction is used with irectsoft and the HPP. The following paragraphs show how these instructions are used to build simple ladder programs. EN Statement ll L programs require an EN statement as the last instruction. This tells the PU that this is the end of the program. Normally, any instructions placed after the EN statement will not be executed. There are exceptions to this such as interrupt routines, etc.. This chapter will discuss the instruction set in detail. X Simple Rungs You use a contact to start rungs that contain both contacts and coils. The boolean instruction that does this is called a Store or, STR instruction. The output point is represented by the Output or, instruction. The following example shows how to enter a single contact and a single output coil. X S Implied HPP ll programs must have an EN statement irectsoft irectsoft Example Y EN Y EN Handheld Mnemonics STR X Y EN L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

128 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions Normally losed ontact Normally closed contacts are also very common. This is accomplished with the Store Not or, STRN instruction. The following example shows a simple rung with a normally closed contact. ontacts in Series Use the N instruction to join two or more contacts in series. The following example shows two contacts in series and a single output coil. The instructions used would be STR X, N X, followed by Y. Midline Outputs Sometimes it is necessary to use midline outputs to get additional outputs that are conditional on other contacts. The following example shows how you can use the N instruction to continue a rung with more conditional outputs. X X X X X irectsoft SOFT Example irectsoft SOFT Example irectsoft irect SOFT Example X X Y EN Y EN Y Y Y EN Handheld Mnemonics STRN X Y EN Handheld Mnemonics STR X N X Y EN Handheld Mnemonics STR X N X Y N X Y N X Y EN L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

129 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions Parallel Elements You also have to join contacts in parallel. The OR instruction allows you to do this. The following example shows two contacts in parallel and a single output coil. The instructions would be STR X, OR X, followed by Y. Joining Series ranches in Parallel Quite often it is necessary to join several groups of series elements in parallel. The Or Store (ORSTR) instruction allows this operation. The following example shows a simple network consisting of series elements joined in parallel. X X Joining Parallel ranches in Series You can also join one or more parallel branches in series. The nd Store (NSTR) instruction allows this operation. The following example shows a simple network with contact branches in series with parallel contacts. X ombination Networks You can combine the various types of series and parallel branches to solve most any application problem. The following example shows a simple combination network. X X X X irectsoft irectsoft irectsoft L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. X X X X X X X Y EN Y EN Y EN Handheld Mnemonics STR X N X STR X N X ORSTR Y EN Handheld Mnemonics STR X OR X Y EN X Handheld Mnemonics STR X STR X OR X NSTR Y EN X Y EN

130 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions omparative oolean Some PL manufacturers make it really difficult to do a simple comparison of two numbers. Some of them require you to move the data all over the place before you can actually perform the comparison. The L Micro PLs provide omparative oolean instructions that allow you to quickly and easily solve this problem. The omparative oolean provides evaluation of two -digit values using boolean contacts. The valid evaluations are: equal to, not equal to, equal to or greater than, and less than. In the following example when the value in V-memory location V is equal to the constant value, Y will energize. oolean Stack There are limits to how many elements you can include in a rung. This is because the L PLs use an -level boolean stack to evaluate the various logic elements. The boolean stack is a temporary storage area that solves the logic for the rung. Each time the program encounters a STR instruction, the instruction is placed on the top of the stack. ny other STR instructions already on the boolean stack are pushed down a level. The NSTR, and ORSTR instructions combine levels of the boolean stack when they are encountered. n error will occur during program compilation if the PU encounters a rung that uses more than the eight levels of the boolean stack. The following example shows how the boolean stack is used to solve boolean logic. STR STR X STR X STR X STR X STR X STR X STR X STR X STR X ORSTR X or (X N X) STR X. X STR STR X X N X X ORSTR OR N X N X X N {X or (X N X)} STR X NSTR XO N (NOT X or X) N {X or (X N X)}..... Y NSTR V Output K N X X N X STR X STR X ORNOT X NOT X OR X N {X OR (X N X)} STR X.. Y L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

131 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions Immediate oolean The L Micro PLs can usually complete an operation cycle in a matter of milliseconds. However, in some applications you may not be able to wait a few milliseconds until the next I/O update occurs. The L PLs offer Immediate input and outputs which are special boolean instructions that allow reading directly from inputs and writing directly to outputs during the program execution portion of the PU cycle. You may recall that this is normally done during the input or output update portion of the PU cycle. The immediate instructions take longer to execute because the program execution is interrupted while the PU reads or writes the I/O point. This function is not normally done until the read inputs or the write outputs portion of the PU cycle. NOTE: Even though the immediate input instruction reads the most current status from the input point, it only uses the results to solve that one instruction. It does not use the new status to update the image register. Therefore, any regular instructions that follow will still use the image register values. ny immediate instructions that follow will access the I/O again to update the status. The immediate output instruction will write the status to the I/O and update the image register. PU Scan Read Inputs X... X X X OFF... ON OFF OFF Input Image Register Read Inputs from Specialty I/O Solve the pplication Program X I Write Outputs iagnostics Y Write Outputs to Specialty I/O The PU reads the inputs from the local base and stores the status in an input image register. ON OFF Immediate instruction does not use the input image register, but instead reads the status from the module immediately. ON OFF X X I/O Point X hanges X X L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

132 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions oolean Instructions Store (STR) The Store instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally open contact. Status of the contact will be the same state as the associated image register point or memory location. Store Not (STRN) The Store Not instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally closed contact. Status of the contact will be opposite the state of the associated image register point or memory location. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays Stage S Timer T ounter T Special Relay SP In the following Store example, when input X is on, output Y will energize. irectsoft irect SOFT X Y aaa aaa Handheld Programmer Keystrokes In the following Store Not example, when input X is off output Y will energize. irectsoft irect SOFT X Y $ STR GX SP STRN GX Handheld Programmer Keystrokes L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

133 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions Store it-of-word (STR) The Store it-of-word instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally open contact. Status of the contact will be the same state as the bit referenced in the associated memory location. Store Not it-of-word (STRN) The Store Not it-of-word instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally closed contact. Status of the contact will be opposite the state of the bit referenced in the associated memory location. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP aaa.bb aaa.bb Operand ata Type L Range aaa bb V-memory See memory map, to Pointer P See memory map, to In the following Store it-of-word example, when bit of V-memory location V is on, output Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes In the following Store Not it-of-word example, when bit of V-memory location V is off, output Y will energize. Y STR V K irectsoft irectsoft. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STRN V K Y L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

134 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions Or (OR) The Or instruction logically ors a normally open contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be the same state as the associated image register point or memory location. Or Not (ORN) The Or Not instruction logically ors a normally closed contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be opposite the state of the associated image register point or memory location. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays Stage S Timer T ounter T Special Relay SP aaa aaa In the following Or example, when input X or X is on, output Y will energize. irectsoft irect SOFT X X In the following Or Not example, when input X is on or X is off, output Y will energize. irectsoft irect SOFT X X Y Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR Q OR GX $ STR GX Handheld Programmer Keystrokes R ORN F F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

135 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions Or it-of-word (OR) The Or it-of-word instruction logically ors a normally open contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. Status of the contact will be the same state as the bit referenced in the associated memory location. Or Not it-of-word (ORN) The Or Not it-of-word instruction logically ors a normally closed contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. Status of the contact will be opposite the state of the bit referenced in the associated memory location. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP aaa.bb aaa.bb Operand ata Type L Range aaa bb V-memory See memory map, to Pointer P See memory map, to In the following Or it-of-word example, when input X or bit of V is on, output Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft X. STR In the following Or it-of-word example, when input X is on or bit of V is off, output Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft X. Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes OR V K STR Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ORN V K L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

136 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions nd (N) The nd instruction logically ands a normally open contact in series with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be the same state as the associated image register point or memory location. nd Not (NN) The nd Not instruction logically ands a normally closed contact in series with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be opposite the state of the associated image register point or memory location. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays Stage S Timer T ounter T Special Relay SP In the following nd example, when input X and X are on output Y will energize. irectsoft irect SOFT X In the following nd Not example, when input X is on and X is off output Y will energize. irectsoft irect SOFT X X X Y Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR V N GX $ STR W NN GX F F aaa aaa Handheld Programmer Keystrokes L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

137 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions nd it-of-word (N) The nd it-of-word instruction logically ands a normally open contact in series with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be the same state as the bit referenced in the associated memory location. nd Not it-of-word (NN) The nd Not it-of-word instruction logically ands a normally closed contact in series with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be opposite the state of the bit referenced in the associated memory location. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP aaa.bb aaa.bb Operand ata Type L Range aaa bb V-memory See memory map, to Pointer P See memory map, to In the following nd it-of-word example, when input X and bit of V is on output Y will energize. irectsoft X. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR N In the following nd Not it-of-word example, when input X is on and bit of V is off output Y will energize. irectsoft X Y V K. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR Y NN V K L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

138 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions nd Store (N STR) The nd Store instruction logically ands two branches of a rung in series. oth branches must begin with the Store instruction. S Implied HPP Or Store (OR STR) The Or Store instruction logically ors two branches of a rung in parallel. oth branches must begin with the Store instruction. S Implied HPP In the following nd Store example, the branch consisting of contacts X, X, and X have been anded with the branch consisting of contact X. irectsoft irect SOFT X In the following Or Store example, the branch consisting of X and X have been ored with the branch consisting of X and X. irectsoft irect SOFT X X X X X X X Y Y $ STR $ STR V N Q OR L NST GX Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR V N $ STR GX Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V N M ORST E F E F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

139 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions S HPP S HPP Out () The Out instruction reflects the status of the rung (on/off) and outputs the discrete (on/off) state to the specified image register point or memory location. Multiple Out instructions referencing the same discrete location should not be used since only the last Out instruction in the program will control the physical output point. Instead, use the next instruction, the Or Out. Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays In the following Out example, when input X is on, output Y and Y will energize. irectsoft SOFT Or Out (OR) The Or Out instruction allows more than one rung of discrete logic to control a single output. Multiple Or Out instructions referencing the same output coil may be used, since all contacts controlling the output are logically ORed together. If the status of any rung is on, the output will also be on. In the following example, when X or X is on, Y will energize. irectsoft irect SOFT X X X Y OR Y OR Y Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR O INST# $ STR O INST# Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX GX F E F F Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays aaa aaa OR L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

140 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions S HPP Out it-of-word () The Out it-of-word instruction reflects the status of the rung (on/off) and outputs the discrete (on/off) state to the specified bit in the referenced memory location. Multiple Out it-of-word instructions referencing the same bit of the same word generally should not be used since only the last Out instruction in the program will control the status of the bit. aaa.bb Operand ata Type L Range aaa bb V-memory See memory map, to Pointer P See memory map, to In the following Out it-of-word example, when input X is on, bit of V and bit of V will turn on. irectsoft X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR.. V K V K The following Out it-of-word example contains two Out it-of-word instructions using the same bit in the same memory word. The final state bit of V is ultimately controlled by the last rung of logic referencing it. X will override the logic state controlled by X. To avoid this situation, multiple outputs using the same location must not be used in programming. location must not be used in programming. X X.. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

141 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions S HPP S HPP Not (NOT) The Not instruction inverts the status of the rung at the point of the instruction. In the following example when X is off, Y will energize. This is because the Not instruction inverts the status of the rung at the Not instruction. irectsoft irectsoft X NOTE: irectsoft Release.i and later supports the use of the NOT instruction. The above example rung is merely intended to show the visual representation of the NOT instruction. The rung cannot be created or displayed in irectsoft versions earlier than.i. Positive ifferential (P) The Positive ifferential instruction is typically known as a one shot. When the input logic produces an off to on transition, the output will energize for one PU scan. In the following example, every time X makes an off to on transition, will energize for one scan. Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX N TMR O INST# aaa P Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays irectsoft irectsoft X P Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR P V T MLR L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

142 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions S HPP S HPP Store Positive ifferential (STRP) The Store Positive ifferential instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally open contact. The contact closes for one PU scan when the state of the associated image register point makes an Off-to-On transition. Thereafter, the contact remains open until the next Off-to-On transition (the symbol inside the contact represents the transition). This function is sometimes called a one-shot. This contact will also close on a program-to-run transition if it is within a retentative range and on before the PL mode transition. Store Negative ifferential (STRN) The Store Negative ifferential instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a normally closed contact. The contact closes for one PU scan when the state of the associated image register point makes an On-to-Off transition. Thereafter, the contact remains open until the next On-to-Off transition (the symbol inside the contact represents the transition). aaa aaa Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays Stage S Timer T ounter T In the following example, each time X is makes an Off-to-On transition, Y will energize for one scan. irectsoft irectsoft X Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes In the following example, each time X is makes an On-to-Off transition, Y will energize for one scan. irectsoft irectsoft X Y $ STR GX $ STR GX P V E N TMR Handheld Programmer Keystrokes E L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

143 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions Or Positive ifferential (ORP) The Or Positive ifferential instruction logically ors a contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be open until the associated image register point makes an Off-to-On transition, closing it for one PU scan. Thereafter, it remains open until another Off-to-On transition. Or Negative ifferential (ORN) The Or Negative ifferential instruction logically ors a contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be open until the associated image register point makes an On-to-Off transition, closing it for one PU scan. Thereafter, it remains open until another On-to-Off transition. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays Stage S Timer T ounter T aaa aaa In the following example, Y will energize whenever X is on, or for one PU scan when X transitions from Off to On. irectsoft irectsoft X X Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes In the following example, Y will energize whenever X is on, or for one PU scan when X transitions from On to Off. irectsoft irectsoft X X Y $ STR Q OR GX $ STR GX P V F N TMR Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Q OR F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

144 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions nd Positive ifferential (NP) The nd Positive ifferential instruction logically ands a contact in series with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be open until the associated image register point makes an Off-to-On transition, closing it for one PU scan. Thereafter, it remains open until another Off-to-On transition. nd Negative ifferential (NN) The nd Negative ifferential instruction logically ands a contact in series with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be open until the associated image register point makes an On-to-Off transition, closing it for one PU scan. Thereafter, it remains open until another On-to-Off transition. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays Stage S Timer T ounter T aaa aaa In the following example, Y will energize for one PU scan whenever X is on and X transitions from Off to On. irectsoft irectsoft X X Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes In the following example, Y will energize for one PU scan whenever X is on and X transitions from On to Off. irectsoft irectsoft X X Y $ STR Q OR GX $ STR GX P V F N TMR Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Q OR F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

145 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions S HPP S HPP Set (SET) The Set instruction sets or turns on an image register point/memory location or a consecutive range of image register points/memory locations. Once the point/location is set it will remain on until it is reset using the Reset instruction. It is not necessary for the input controlling the Set instruction to remain on. Reset (RST) The Reset instruction resets or turns off an image register point/memory location or a range of image registers points/memory locations. Once the point/location is reset it is not necessary for the input to remain on. In the following example when X is on, Y through Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft X Y In the following example when X is on, Y through Y will be reset or de energized. irectsoft irectsoft X Y SET RST Y Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR X SET $ STR S RST aaa SET Optional memory range aaa Optional Memory. range aaa aaa RST Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays Stage S Timer T ounter T Handheld Programmer Keystrokes F F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

146 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions S HPP S HPP Set it-of-word (SET) The Set it-of-word instruction sets or turns on a bit in a V-memory location. Once the bit is set it will remain on until it is reset using the Reset it-of-word instruction. It is not necessary for the input controlling the Set it-of-word instruction to remain on. Reset it-of-word (RST) The Reset it-of-word instruction resets or turns off a bit in a V-memory location. Once the bit is reset it is not necessary for the input to remain on. In the following example when X turns on, bit in V is set to the on state. irectsoft irectsoft X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR. SET SET V K aaa.bb SET aaa.bb RST Operand ata Type L Range aaa bb V-memory See memory map, to Pointer P See memory map, to In the following example when X turns on, bit in V is reset to the off state. irectsoft irectsoft X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STR. RST V K RST L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

147 hapter : Standard RLL - oolean Instructions S HPP Pause (PUSE) The Pause instruction disables the output update on a range of outputs. The ladder program will continue to run and update the image register. However, the outputs in the range specified in the Pause instruction will be turned off at the output points. Y aaa aaa PUSE Operand ata Type L Range aaa Outputs Y In the following example, when X is ON, Y-Y will be turned OFF. The execution of the ladder program will not be affected. irectsoft irectsoft X Y Y PUSE Since the HPP Handheld Programmer does not have a specific Pause key, you can use the corresponding instruction number for entry (#), or type each letter of the command. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR O INST# J G In some cases, you may want certain output points in the specified pause range to operate normally. In that case, use ux to over-ride the Pause instruction. F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

148 hapter : Standard RLL - omparative oolean Instructions omparative oolean S HPP S HPP Store If Equal (STRE) The Store If Equal instruction begins a new rung or additional branch in a rung with a normally open comparative contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa is equal tobbb. Store If Not Equal (STRNE) The Store If Not Equal instruction begins a new rung or additional branch in a rung with a normally closed comparative contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa does not equal bbb. Operand ata Type V aaa V aaa bbb bbb L Range aaa bbb V-memory V ll (See page ) ll (See page ) Pointer P ll (See page ) ll (See page ) onstant K In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V =, Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft V K Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V is not equal to, Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft V K Y E E J Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SP STRN GX F E G L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

149 hapter : Standard RLL - omparative oolean Instructions Or If Equal (ORE) The Or If Equal instruction connects a normally open comparative contact in parallel with another contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa is equal to bbb. Or If Not Equal (ORNE) The Or If Not Equal instruction connects a normally closed comparative contact in parallel with another contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa does not equal bbb. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP Operand ata Type L Range aaa bbb V-memory V ll (See page ) ll (See page ) Pointer P ll (See page ) ll (See page ) onstant K In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V = or V =, Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft V V In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V = or V is not equal to, Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft V V K K K K Y Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR E Q OR GX Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR R ORN GX F J F E E E E E F G V aaa V aaa bbb bbb L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

150 hapter : Standard RLL - omparative oolean Instructions nd If Equal (NE) The nd If Equal instruction connects a normally open comparative contact in series with another contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa is equal to bbb. nd If Not Equal (NNE) The nd If Not Equal instruction connects a normally closed comparative contact in series with another contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa does not equal bbb S Implied HPP S Implied HPP V aaa V aaa Operand ata Type L Range / aaa bbb V-memory V ll (See page ) ll (See page ) Pointer P ll (See page ) ll (See page ) onstant K In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V = and V =, Y will energize. irectsoft V K V K Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes F V N bbb bbb In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V = and V does not equal, Y will energize. irectsoft V K V K Y $ STR GX $ STR F V N E E E E E E F Handheld Programmer Keystrokes GX F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

151 hapter : Standard RLL - omparative oolean Instructions S HPP S HPP Store (STR) The omparative Store instruction begins a new rung or additional branch in a rung with a normally open comparative contact. The contact will be on when aaa is equal to or greater than bbb. Store Not (STRN) The omparative Store Not instruction begins a new rung or additional branch in a rung with a normally closed comparative contact. The contact will be on when aaa is less than bbb. aaa aaa bbb bbb Operand ata Type L Range / aaa bbb V-memory V ll (See page ) ll (See page ) Pointer p ll (See page ) ll (See page ) onstant K Timer T ounter T In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V, Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft V K Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V <, Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft V K Y $ STR GX E V N Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SP STRN GX V N F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

152 hapter : Standard RLL - omparative oolean Instructions Or (OR) The omparative Or instruction connects a normally open comparative contact in parallel with another contact. The contact will be on when aaa is equal to or greater than bbb. Or Not (ORN) The omparative Or Not instruction connects a normally open comparative contact in parallel with another contact. The contact will be on when aaa is less than bbb. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP irectsoft irectsoft V V aaa aaa bbb bbb Operand ata Type L Range / aaa bbb V-memory V ll (See page ) ll (See page ) Pointer p ll (See page ) ll (See page ) onstant K Timer T ounter T In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V = or V, Y will energize. K K Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR G Q OR GX In the following example when the value in V-memory location V = or V <, Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft V V K K Y F E E E E F V N F Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR R ORN GX V N L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

153 hapter : Standard RLL - omparative oolean Instructions nd (N) The omparative nd instruction connects a normally open comparative contact in series with another contact. The contact will be on when aaa is equal to or greater than bbb. nd Not (NN) The omparative nd Not instruction connects a normally open comparative contact in parallel with another contact. The contact will be on when aaa is less than bbb. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP aaa aaa Operand ata Type L Range / aaa bbb V-memory V ll (See page ) ll (See page ) Pointer p ll (See page ) ll (See page ) onstant K Timer T ounter T In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V =, and V, Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft V K V K Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V = and V <, Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft V K V K Y $ STR F V N GX H W NN F E E V N F Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX E V N bbb bbb L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

154 hapter : Standard RLL - Immediate Instructions Immediate Instructions S HPP S HPP Store Immediate (STRI) The Store Immediate instruction begins a new rung or additional branch in a rung. The status of the contact will be the same as the status of the associated input point at the time the instruction is executed. The image register is not updated. Store Not Immediate (STRNI) The Store Not Immediate instruction begins a new rung or additional branch in a rung. The status of the contact will be opposite the status of the associated input point at the time the instruction is executed. The image register is not updated. In the following example when X is on, Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft X Y In the following example when X is off, Y will energize. Or Immediate (ORI) The Or Immediate connects two contacts in parallel. The status of the contact will be the same as the status of the associated input point at the time the instruction is executed. The image register is not updated. Or Not Immediate (ORNI) The Or Not Immediate connects two contacts in parallel. The status of the contact will be opposite the status of the associated input point at the time the instruction is executed. The image register is not updated. S Implied HPP S Implied HPP Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X irectsoft X Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX I X aaa X aaa Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SP STRN GX I X aaa X aaa L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

155 hapter : Standard RLL - Immediate Instructions OR Immediate Instructions (cont d) Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X In the following example, when X or X is on, Y will energize. irectsoft irectsoft X X Y In the following example, when X is on or X is off, Y will energize. X X Y nd Immediate (NI) The nd Immediate connects two contacts in series. The status of the contact will be the same as the status of the associated input point at the time the instruction is executed. The image register is not updated. S Implied HPP irectsoft irectsoft nd Not Immediate (NNI) The nd Not Immediate connects two contacts in series. The status of the contact will be opposite the status of the associated input point at the time the instruction is executed. The image register is not updated. S Implied HPP irectsoft X X Y L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR Q OR GX GX I F F Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Operand ata Type L Range aaa Inputs X $ STR R ORN GX In the following example, when X and X are on, Y will energize. irectsoft X X Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR V N In the following example, when X is on and X is off, Y will energize. I F I Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR W NN GX I F X aaa X aaa

156 hapter : Standard RLL - Immediate Instructions S HPP S HPP Out Immediate (I) The Out Immediate instruction reflects the status of the rung (on/off) and outputs the discrete (on/off) status to the specified module output point and the image register at the time the instruction is executed. If multiple Out Immediate instructions referencing the same discrete point are used it is possible for the module output status to change multiple times in a PU scan. See Or Out Immediate. Or Out Immediate (ORI) The Or Out Immediate instruction has been designed to use more than rung of discrete logic to control a single output. Multiple Or Out Immediate instructions referencing the same output coil may be used, since all contacts controlling the output are ored together. If the status of any rung is on at the time the instruction is executed, the output will also be on. Operand ata Type L Range aaa Outputs Y In the following example, when X is on, output point Y on the output module will turn on. For instruction entry on the Handheld Programmer, you can use the instruction number (#) as shown, or type each letter of the command. irectsoft irectsoft X Y I Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR O INST# In the following example, when X or X is on, Y will energize. irectsoft X X Y OR I Y OR I $ STR F Y aaa I Y aaa ORI L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR O INST# O INST# F E F

157 hapter : Standard RLL - Immediate Instructions S HPP S HPP Set Immediate (SETI) The Set Immediate instruction immediately sets, or turns on an output or a range of outputs in the image register and the corresponding output point(s) at the time the instruction is executed. Once the outputs are set it is not necessary for the input to remain on. The Reset Immediate instruction can be used to reset the outputs. Reset Immediate (RSTI) The Reset Immediate instruction immediately resets, or turns off an output or a range of outputs in the image register and the output point(s) at the time the instruction is executed. Once the outputs are reset it is not necessary for the input to remain on. irectsoft irectsoft Y aaa SETI Y aaa RSTI In the following example, when X is on, Y through Y will be set on in the image register and on the corresponding output points. X irectsoft irectsoft Operand ata Type L Range aaa Outputs Y Y Y SETI Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR X SET In the following example, when X is on, Y through Y will be reset (off) in the image register and on the corresponding output module(s). X Y Y RSTI I I Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR S RST F F aaa aaa L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

158 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions Using Timers Timers are used to time an event for a desired length of time. The single input timer will time as long as the input is on. When the input changes from on to off the timer current value is reset to. There is a tenth of a second and a hundredth of a second timer available with a maximum time of. and. seconds respectively. There is a discrete bit associated with each timer to indicate that the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the timer input, associated discrete bit, current value, and timer preset. X T urrent Value There are those applications that need an accumulating timer, meaning it has the ability to time, stop, and then resume from where it previously stopped. The accumulating timer works similarly to the regular timer, but two inputs are required. The start/stop input starts and stops the timer. When the timer stops, the elapsed time is maintained. When the timer starts again, the timing continues from the elapsed time. When the reset input is turned on, the elapsed time is cleared and the timer will start at when it is restarted. There is a tenth of a second and a hundredth of a second timer available with a maximum time of. and. seconds respectively. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the timer input, timer reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and timer preset. X X T urrent Value Seconds / Seconds Seconds / Seconds X Timer Preset T X Enable X Reset Input TMR K TMR K T Y T L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

159 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions S HPP Timer (TMR) and Timer Fast (TMRF) The Timer instruction is a. second single input timer that times to a maximum of. seconds. The Timer Fast instruction is a. second single input timer that times up to a maximum of. seconds. These timers will be enabled if the input logic is true (on) and will be reset to if the input logic is false (off). Instruction Specifications Timer Reference (Taaa): Specifies the timer number. Preset Value (bbb): onstant value (K) or a V-memory location. urrent Value: Timer current values () are accessed by referencing the associated V or T memory location*. For example, the timer current value for T physically resides in V-memory location V as a value. iscrete Status it: The discrete status bit is referenced by the associated T memory location. Operating as a timer done bit, it will be on if the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example, the discrete status bit for Timer is T. TMR T aaa bbb Preset Timer # TMRF bbb NOTE: Timer preset constants (K) may be changed by using a handheld programmer, even when the PU is in Run Mode. Therefore, a V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program must change the preset. NOTE: * May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used. ** With the HPP, both the Timer discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data reference. irectsoft uses separate references, such as T for discrete status bit for Timer T, and T for the current value of Timer T. You can perform functions when the timer reaches the specified preset using the discrete status bit. Or, use comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals, based on one timer. The examples on the following page show these two methods of programming timers. T aaa Preset Timer # The timer discrete status bit and the current value are not specified in the timer instruction Operand ata Type L Range / aaa bbb Timers T V-memory for preset values V * Pointers (preset only) P onstants (preset only) K Timer discrete status bits T/V or V Timer current values V /T** L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

160 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions Timer Example Using iscrete Status its In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of seconds. The timer discrete status bit (T) will turn on when the timer has timed for seconds. The timer is reset when X turns off, turns off the discrete status bit and resets the timer current value to. irectsoft irect SOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR N TMR $ STR GX X T T MLR TMR K Y T X T Y urrent Value Timing iagram Seconds Timer Example Using omparative ontacts In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of. seconds. omparative contacts are used to energize Y, Y, and Y at one second intervals respectively. When X is turned off the timer will be reset to and the comparative contacts will turn off Y, Y, and Y. irectsoft SOFT T T T X K K K Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR N TMR $ STR GX $ STR GX $ STR GX E F T MLR T MLR T MLR E TMR T K Y Y Y F X Y Y Y T urrent Value Timing iagram Seconds L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

161 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions S HPP S HPP ccumulating Timer (TMR) The ccumulating Timer is a. second two input timer that will time to a maximum of.. ccumulating Fast Timer (TMRF) The ccumulating Fast Timer is a. second two-input timer that will time to a maximum of.. Each one uses two timer registers in V-memory. These timers have two inputs, an enable and a reset. The timer starts timing when the enable is on and stops when the enable is off (without resetting the count). The reset will reset the timer when on and allow the timer to time when off. Instruction Specifications Timer Reference (Taaa): Specifies the timer number. Preset Value (bbb): onstant value (K) or a V-memory location. urrent Value: Timer current values () are accessed by referencing the associated V or T memory location*. For example, the timer current value for T resides in V-memory location V as a value. Enable TMR bbb iscrete Status it: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated T memory location. Operating as a timer done bit, it will be on if the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example the discrete status bit for timer would be T. NOTE: The accumulating type timer uses two consecutive V-memory locations for the -digit value, and therefore two consecutive timer locations. For example, if TMR is used, the next available timer number is TMR. NOTE: * May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used. ** With the HPP, both the Timer discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data reference. irectsoft uses separate references, such as T for discrete status bit for Timer T, and T for the current value of Timer T. The following examples show two methods of programming timers. One performs functions when the timer reaches the preset value using the discrete status bit, or use comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals. Reset T aaa Preset Timer # Enable Reset TMRF bbb T aaa Preset Timer # The timer discrete status bit and the current value are not specified in the timer instruction Operand ata Type L Range / aaa bbb Timers T V-memory for preset values V / * Pointers (preset only) P / onstants (preset only) K Timer discrete status bits T/V or V Timer current values V /T** L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

162 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions ccumulating Timer Example using iscrete Status its In the following example, a two input timer (accumulating timer) is used with a preset of seconds. The timer discrete status bit (T) will turn on when the timer has timed for seconds. Notice in this example that the timer times for second, stops for one second, then resumes timing. The timer will reset when turns on, turning the discrete status bit off and resetting the timer current value to. irectsoft SOFT X T Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR $ STR N TMR G TMR K Y T X T urrent Value Seconds ccumulator Timer Example Using omparative ontacts In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of. seconds. omparative contacts are used to energized Y, Y, and Y at one second intervals respectively. The comparative contacts will turn off when the timer is reset. ontacts irectsoft X T T T K K K Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR $ STR N TMR $ STR V N Q OR GX T E E K T T T MLR K K T MLR T MLR TMR K E Y Y T K T K Y T F X Y Y Y T urrent Value Timing iagram Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) $ STR GX T MLR GX F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. G Timing iagram Seconds Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont d) $ STR V N Q OR GX $ STR V N E E E E / Seconds T MLR T MLR T MLR T MLR T MLR

163 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions Using ounters ounters are used to count events. The counters available are up counters, up/down counters, and stage counters (used with RLL PLUS programming). The up counter has two inputs, a count input and a reset input. The maximum count value is. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the counter input, counter reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and counter preset. X X T urrent alue The up down counter has three inputs, a count up input, count down input and reset input. The maximum count value is. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the counter input, counter reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and counter preset. X X X T urrent Value The stage counter has a count input and is reset by the RST instruction. This instruction is useful when programming using the RLL PLUS structured programming. The maximum count value is. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the counter input, associated discrete bit, current value, counter preset and reset instruction. X T urrent Value RST T ounts ounts ounts X X Up Reset NT ounter preset X X X X Up own Reset U ounter Preset K K SGNT K ounter preset T T T L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

164 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions S HPP ounter (NT) The ounter is a two input counter that increments when the count input logic transitions from off to on. When the counter reset input is on the counter resets to. When the current value equals the preset value, the counter status bit comes on and the counter continues to count up to a maximum count of. The maximum value will be held until the counter is reset. Instruction Specifications ounter Reference (Taaa): Specifies the counter number. Preset Value (bbb): onstant value (K) or a V-memory location as a value. ount NT T aaa bbb urrent Values: ounter current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or T memory locations*. The V-memory location is the counter location +. For example, the counter current value for T resides in V-memory location V as a value. iscrete Status it: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated T memory location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example the discrete status bit for counter would be T. Reset Preset ounter # The counter discrete status bit and the current value are not specified in the counter instruction. NOTE: ounter preset constants (K) may be changed by using a programming device, even when the PU is in Run Mode. Therefore, a V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program must change the preset. Operand ata Type L Range / aaa bbb ounters T V-memory (preset only) V * Pointers (preset only) P onstants (preset only) K ounter discrete status bits T/V or V ounter current values V /T** NOTE: * May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used. ** With the HPP, both the ounter discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data reference. irectsoft uses separate references, such as T for discrete status bit for ounter T, and T for the current value of ounter T. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

165 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions ounter Example Using iscrete Status its In the following example, when X makes an off to on transition, counter T will increment by one. When the current value reaches the preset value of, the counter status bit T will turn on and energize Y. When the reset turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the current value will be. The current value for counter T will be held in V-memory location V. irectsoft irectsoft X T Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR $ STR GY NT NT K T Y X T or Y urrent Value ounting diagram Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) ounter Example Using omparative ontacts In the following example, when X makes an off to on transition, counter T will increment by one. omparative contacts are used to energize Y, Y, and Y at different counts. When the reset turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be, and the comparative contacts will turn off. irectsoft irectsoft X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR $ STR GY NT $ STR T T T K K K NT T MLR K Y Y Y T X Y Y Y urrent Value $ STR GX ounting diagram T MLR Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) $ STR GX $ STR E T MLR T MLR GX GX F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

166 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions S HPP Stage ounter (SGNT) The Stage ounter is a single input counter that increments when the input logic transitions from off to on. This counter differs from other counters since it will hold its current value until reset using the RST instruction. The Stage ounter is designed for use in RLL PLUS programs but can be used in relay ladder logic programs. When the current value equals the preset value, the counter status bit turns on and the counter continues to count up to a maximum count of. The maximum value will be held until the counter is reset. Instruction Specifications ounter Reference (Taaa): Specifies the counter number. Preset Value (bbb): onstant value (K) or a V-memory location. SGNT T aaa bbb Preset ounter # The counter discrete status bit and the current value are not specified in the counter instruction. urrent Values: ounter current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or T memory locations*. The V-memory location is the counter location +. For example, the counter current value for T resides in V-memory location V. iscrete Status it: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated T memory location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example the discrete status bit for counter would be T. Operand ata Type L Range / aaa bbb ounters T V-memory (preset only) V * Pointers (preset only) P onstants (preset only) K ounter discrete status bits T/V or V ounter current values V /T** NOTE: * May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used. ** With the HPP, both the ounter discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data reference. irectsoft uses separate references, such as T for discrete status bit for ounter T, and T for the current value of ounter T. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

167 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions Stage ounter Example Using iscrete Status its In the following example, when X makes an off to on transition, stage counter T will increment by one. When the current value reaches, the counter status bit T will turn on and energize Y. The counter status bit T will remain on until the counter is reset using the RST instruction. When the counter is reset, the counter status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be. The current value for counter T will be held in V-memory location V. irectsoft irectsoft Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR H $ STR X T S RST GY NT T MLR SGNT T K T Y Stage ounter Example Using omparative ontacts In the following example, when X makes an off to on transition, counter T will increment by one. omparative contacts are used to energize Y, Y, and Y at different counts. lthough this is not shown in the example, when the counter is reset using the Reset instruction, the counter status bit will turn off and the current value will be. The current value for counter T will be held in V-memory location V. irectsoft irectsoft G Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR $ STR GX T T T X K K K S RST G GY NT L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. RST H T MLR Y Y SGNT T K Y X Y urrent Value RST T GX $ STR S RST ounting diagram Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) X Y Y Y urrent Value RST T F T MLR H ounting diagram Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) $ STR GX $ STR GX E F T MLR T MLR

168 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions S HPP Up own ounter (U) This Up/own ounter counts up on each off to on transition of the Up input and counts down on each off to on transition of the own input. The counter is reset to when the Reset input is on. The count range is. The count input not being used must be off in order for the active count input to function. Instruction Specification ounter Reference (Taaa): Specifies the counter number. Preset Value (bbb): onstant value (K) or two consecutive V-memory locations as a value. urrent Values: urrent count is a double word value accessed by referencing the associated V or T memory locations*. The V-memory location is the counter location +. For example, the counter current value for T resides in V-memory location V and V as a value. iscrete Status it: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated T memory location. Operating as a counter done bit it will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example the discrete status bit for counter would be T. U T aaa bbb NOTE: * May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used. ** With the HPP, both the ounter discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data reference. irectsoft uses separate references, such as T for discrete status bit for ounter T, and T for the current value of ounter T. Up own Reset ounter # Preset aution: The U uses two V-memory locations for the digit current value. This means that the U uses two consecutive counter locations. If U T is used in the program, the next available counter is T. The counter discrete status bit and the current value are not specified in the counter instruction Operand ata Type L Range / aaa bbb ounters T V-memory (preset only) V * Pointers (preset only) P onstants (preset only) K ounter discrete status bits T/V or V ounter current values V /T** L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

169 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions Up / own ounter Example Using iscrete Status its In the following example if X and X are off,when X toggles from off to on the counter will increment by one. If X and X are off the counter will decrement by one when X toggles from off to on. When the count value reaches the preset value of, the counter status bit will turn on. When the reset X turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the current value will be. irectsoft irectsoft X X X T Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR $ STR $ STR U ISG U T K Y Up / own ounter Example Using omparative ontacts In the following example, when X makes an off to on transition, counter T will increment by one. omparative contacts are used to energize Y and Y at different counts. When the reset (X) turns on, the counter status bit will turn off, the current value will be, and the comparative contacts will turn off. irectsoft irectsoft X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR $ STR $ STR $ STR T X X K V N U T V T K Y U ISG T MLR Y L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. X X X T urrent Value X X X Y Y urrent Value Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) $ STR GX ounting iagram T MLR ounting iagram Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) GX $ STR GX E T MLR

170 hapter : Standard RLL - Timer, ounter and Shift Register Instructions S HPP Shift Register (SR) The Shift Register instruction shifts data through a predefined number of control relays. The control ranges in the shift register block must start at the beginning of an bit boundary use -bit blocks. The Shift Register has three contacts. T LOK ata determines the value ( or ) that will enter the register RESET lock shifts the bits one position on each low to high transition Reset resets the Shift Register to all zeros. With each off to on transition of the clock input, the bits which make up the shift register block are shifted by one bit position and the status of the data input is placed into the starting bit position in the shift register. The direction of the shift depends on the entry in the From and To fields. From to would define a block of sixteen bits to be shifted from left to right. From to would define a block of sixteen bits, to be shifted from right to left. The maximum size of the shift register block depends on the number of available control relays. The minimum block size is control relays. irectsoft SOFT X X X ata Input lock Input Reset Input Inputs on Successive Scans Indicates ON SR From To Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR $ STR $ STR Shift Register its Indicates OFF S RST H R ORN SR From aaa To bbb Operand ata Type L Range / aaa bbb ontrol Relay L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

171 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions Using the ccumulator The accumulator in the L internal PUs is a bit register which is used as a temporary storage location for data that is being copied or manipulated in some manor. For example, you have to use the accumulator to perform math operations such as add, subtract, multiply, etc. Since there are bits, you can use up to an -digit number. The accumulator is reset to at the end of every PU scan. opying ata to the ccumulator The Load and Out instructions and their variations are used to copy data from a V-memory location to the accumulator, or, to copy data from the accumulator to V-memory. The following example copies data from V-memory location V to V-memory location V. X L V opy data from V to the lower bits of the accumulator V opy data from the lower bits of the accumulator to V Since the accumulator is bits and V-memory locations are bits the Load ouble and Out ouble (or variations thereof) use two consecutive V-memory locations or digit constants to copy data either to the accumulator from a V-memory address or from a V-memory address to the accumulator. For example if you wanted to copy data from V and V to V and V the most efficient way to perform this function would be as follows: X L V opy data from V and V to the accumulator V opy data from the accumulator to V and V cc. Unused accumulator bits are set to zero cc. V V V V V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

172 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions hanging the ccumulator ata Instructions that manipulate data also use the accumulator. The result of the manipulated data resides in the accumulator. The data that was being manipulated is cleared from the accumulator. The following example loads the constant value into the accumulator, shifts the data right bits, and outputs the result to V. X L K Load the value into the accumulator SHFR K Shift the data in the accumulator bits (K) to the right V Output the lower bits of the accumulator to V Some of the data manipulation instructions use bits. They use two consecutive V-memory locations or an digit constant to manipulate data in the accumulator. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is added with the value in V and V using the dd ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. X L onstant cc. The upper bits of the accumulator will be set to cc. V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator V dd the value in the accumulator with the value in V and V V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V V V V V V (ccumulator) + (V& V) cc. Shifted out of accumulator L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

173 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions Using the ccumulator Stack The accumulator stack is used for instructions that require more than one parameter to execute a function or for user defined functionality. The accumulator stack is used when more than one Load instruction is executed without the use of an Out instruction. The first load instruction in the scan places a value into the accumulator. Every Load instruction thereafter without the use of an Out instruction places a value into the accumulator and the value that was in the accumulator is placed onto the accumulator stack. The Out instruction nullifies the previous load instruction and does not place the value that was in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack when the next load instruction is executed. Every time a value is placed onto the accumulator stack the other values in the stack are pushed down one location. The accumulator is eight levels deep (eight bit registers). If there is a value in the eighth location when a new value is placed onto the stack, the value in the eighth location is pushed off the stack and cannot be recovered. X L K Load the value into the accumulator L K Load the value into the accumulator, pushing the value onto the stack L K Load the value into the accumulator, pushing the value to the st stack location and the value to the nd stack location onstant urrent cc. value cc. Previous cc. value cc. X X X X X X X X urrent cc. value cc. onstant Previous cc. value cc. urrent cc. value cc. onstant Previous cc. value cc. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X The POP instruction rotates values upward through the stack into the accumulator. When a POP is executed the value which was in the accumulator is cleared and the value that was on top of the stack is in the accumulator. The values in the stack are shifted up one position in the stack. Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level ccumulator Stack X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ccumulator Stack X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ccumulator Stack X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ucket ucket ucket L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

174 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions X POP POP the st value on the stack into the accumulator and move stack values up one location POP POP V opy data from the accumulator to V POP the st value on the stack into the accumulator and move stack values up one location V opy data from the accumulator to V. POP the st value on the stack into the accumulator and move stack values up one location V opy data from the accumulator to V Previous cc. value cc. X X X X X X X X urrent cc. value cc. Previous cc. value cc. V urrent cc. value cc. Previous cc. value cc. V urrent cc. value cc. X X X X V Using Pointers Many of the L series instructions will allow V-memory pointers as a operand (commonly known as indirect addressing). Pointers allow instructions to obtain data from V-memory locations referenced by the pointer value. NOTE: L V-memory addressing is in octal. However, the pointers reference a V-memory location with values viewed as HEX. Use the Load ddress (L) instruction to move an address into the pointer location. This instruction performs the Octal to Hexadecimal conversion automatically. In the following simple example we are using a pointer operand in a Load instruction. V-memory location is being used as the pointer location. V contains the value which the PU views as the Hex equivalent of the Octal address V-memory location V. The PU will copy the data from V which in this example contains the value into the lower word of the accumulator. Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level ccumulator Stack X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ccumulator Stack X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ccumulator Stack X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

175 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions X X L P V (P) contains the value HEX. HEX. = Octal which contains the value. V opy the data from the lower bits of the accumulator to V. V X X X X V X X X X V V X X X X V X X X X V X X X X V X X X X V X X X X V V X X X X ccumulator The following example is identical to the one above with one exception. The L (Load ddress) instruction automatically converts the Octal address to Hex. L O V L P V Load the lower bits of the accumulator with Hexadecimal equivalent to Octal () opy the data from the lower bits of the accumulator to V V (P) contains the value Hex. Hex. = Octal which contains the value opy the data from the lower bits of the accumulator to V V V Unused accumulator bits are set to zero cc. V V X X X X V X X X X V V X X X X V X X X X V X X X X V X X X X V X X X X V V X X X X Octal is converted to Hexadecim and loaded into the accumulator ccumulator L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

176 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions S HPP Load (L) The Load instruction is a bit instruction that loads the L value (aaa), which is either a V-memory location or a aaa digit constant, into the lower bits of the accumulator. The upper bits of the accumulator are set to. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K FFFF iscrete it Flags SP SP SP escription On when the pointer is outside of the available range. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when the value loaded into the accumulator is zero. NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the accumulator stack. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator and output to V. irectsoft irect SOFT X L V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX L NST V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V X SET V N The unused accumulator bits are set to zero cc. V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

177 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions S HPP Load ouble (L) The Load ouble instruction is a bit instruction that loads the value (aaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an digit constant value, into the accumulator. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K FFFF iscrete it Flags SP SP SP escription On when the pointer is outside of the available range. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero. NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the accumulator stack. In the following example, when X is on, the bit value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator and output to V and V. irectsoft irect SOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX X L NST L V Load the value in V and V into the bit accumulator V opy the value in the bit accumulator to V and V cc. L aaa V V V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

178 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions S HPP Load Formatted (LF) The Load Formatted instruction loads consecutive bits from discrete memory locations into the accumulator. The instruction requires a starting location (aaa) and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be loaded. Unused accumulator bit locations are set to zero. LF aaa K bbb Operand ata Type L Range aaa bbb Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays Stage its S Timer its T ounter its T Special Relays SP onstant K iscrete it Flags SP SP escription On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero. NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the accumulator stack. In the following example, when is on, the binary pattern of ( bits) will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower bits of the accumulator are output to Y Y using the Out Formatted instruction. irectsoft irect SOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX L NST F H LF K Load the status of consecutive bits ( ) into the accumulator F Y K opy the value from the specified number of bits in the accumulator to Y Y F H Location cc. Location Y onstant K The unused accumulator bits are set to zero onstant K OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

179 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions S HPP Load ddress (L) The Load ddress instruction is a bit instruction. It converts any octal value or address to the HEX equivalent value and loads the HEX value into the accumulator. This instruction is useful when an address parameter is required since all addresses for the L system are in octal. iscrete it Flags SP SP Operand ata Type Octal ddress O L Range aaa See memory map escription On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero. O aaa NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the accumulator stack. In the following example when X is on, the octal number will be converted to a HEX and loaded into the accumulator using the Load ddress instruction. The value in the lower bits of the accumulator is copied to V using the Out instruction. irectsoft irect SOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR E GX X L NST E L O Load The HEX equivalent to the octal number into the lower bits of the accumulator V opy the value in lower bits of the accumulator to V V N Octal cc. L The unused accumulator bits are set to zero Hexadecimal V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

180 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions S HPP S HPP Out () The Out instruction is a bit instruction that copies the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to a specified aaa V-memory location (aaa). Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map iscrete it Flags SP escription On when the pointer is outside of the available range. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the lower bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower bits of the accumulator are copied to V using the Out instruction.v irectsoft SOFT X L V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Out ouble () The Out ouble instruction is a bit instruction that copies the value in the accumulator to two consecutive V memory locations at a specified starting location (aaa). Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V ll (See page ) Pointer P ll V-memory (See page ) iscrete it Flags SP The unused accumulator bits are set to zero cc. V V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR L NST escription On when the pointer is outside of the available range. In the following example, when X is on, the bit value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irectsoft irect SOFT X L Load the value in V and V into the accumulator V V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V cc. V V V V GX V N $ STR L NST aaa Handheld Programmer Keystrokes GX L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

181 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions S HPP S HPP Out Formatted (F) The Out Formatted instruction outputs bits from the accumulator to the specified discrete memory locations. The instruction requires a starting location (aaa) for the destination and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be output. In the following example, when is on, the binary pattern of ( bits) will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower bits of the accumulator are output to Y Y using the Out Formatted instruction. POP The POP instruction moves the value from the first level of the accumulator stack ( bits) to the accumulator and shifts each value in the stack up one level. F K aaa bbb Operand ata Type L Range aaa bbb Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays onstant K irectsoft Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX L NST F H LF K Load the status of consecutive bits ( ) into the accumulator F K Y opy the value of the specified number of bits from the accumulator to Y Y F H Location ccumulator Location Y onstant K The unused accumulator bits are set to zero K onstant OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y OFF OFF OFF POP ON ON ON OFF iscrete it Flags escription SP On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

182 hapter : Standard RLL - ccumulator/stack Load and Output ata Instructions Pop Instruction (cont d) In the example below, when is on, the value that was on top of the stack is moved into the accumulator using the Pop instruction The value is output to V using the Out instruction. The next Pop moves the value into the accumulator and outputs the value to V. The last Pop moves the value into the accumulator and outputs the value to V. Please note if the value in the stack were greater than bits ( digits) the Out ouble instruction would be used and two V-memory locations for each Out ouble must be allocated. irectsoft SOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX GX GX P V P V P V POP Pop the st. value on the stack into the accumulator and move stack values up one location POP POP V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Pop the st. value on the stack into the accumulator and move stack values up one location V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Pop the st. value on the stack into the accumulator and move stack values up one location V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V O INST# V N O INST# V N O INST# V N P V P V P V Previous cc. value cc. X X X X X X X X urrent cc. value cc. Previous cc. value cc. V urrent cc. value cc. Previous cc. value V cc. urrent cc. value cc. V Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level ccumulator Stack X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ccumulator Stack X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ccumulator Stack X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

183 hapter : Standard RLL - Logical Instructions Logical Instructions (ccumulator) S HPP nd (N) The nd instruction is a bit instruction that logically ands the value in the lower bits of the accumulator with a specified V-memory location (aaa). The result resides in the accumulator. The discrete status flag indicates if the result of the nd is zero. irectsoft irect SOFT X N aaa NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is anded with the value in V using the nd instruction. The value in the lower bits of the accumulator is output to V using the Out instruction. L Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR V N GX L NST Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map iscrete it Flags SP SP V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator N V N the value in the accumulator with the value in V V opy the lower bits of the accumulator to V V N V N escription On if the result in the accumulator is zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. The upper bits of the accumulator will be set to V cc. cc. N (V) cc. G V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

184 hapter : Standard RLL - Logical Instructions S HPP nd ouble (N) The nd ouble is a bit instruction that logically ands the value in the accumulator with two consecutive V-memory locations or an digit (max.) constant value (aaa). The result resides in the accumulator. iscrete status flags indicate if the result of the nd ouble is zero or a negative number (the most significant bit is on). irectsoft irect SOFT X Operand ata Type V-memory V Pointer P onstant K L Range aaa See memory map See memory map FFFFFFFF N K aaa NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is anded with using the nd double instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. L Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR V N GX L NST iscrete it Flags SP SP V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator N K N the value in the accumulator with the constant value V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V K JMP escription On if the result in the accumulator is zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative cc. cc. E V N cc. G E H V G I V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

185 hapter : Standard RLL - Logical Instructions S HPP Or (OR) The Or instruction is a bit instruction that logically ors the value in the lower bits of the accumulator with a specified V- memory location (aaa). The result resides in the accumulator. The discrete status flag indicates if the result of the Or is zero. irectsoft irect SOFT X NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is ored with V using the Or instruction. The value in the lower bits of the accumulator are output to V using the Out instruction. opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR Q OR GX L NST Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map iscrete it Flags SP SP L V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator OR V Or the value in the accumulator with the value in V V V N V N escription On if the result in the accumulator is zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. The upper bits of the accumulator will be set to OR V aaa cc. cc. OR (V) cc. G V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

186 hapter : Standard RLL - Logical Instructions S HPP Or ouble (OR) The Or ouble is a bit instruction that ors the value in the accumulator with the value (aaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an digit (max.) constant value. The result resides in the accumulator. iscrete status flags indicate if the result of the Or ouble is zero or a negative number (the most significant bit is on). OR K aaa NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is ored with using the Or ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irectsoft SOFT X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR Q OR GX L NST L V Load the value in V and V into accumulator OR K OR the value in the accumulator with the constant value V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V Operand ata Type V-memory V Pointer P onstant K iscrete it Flags SP SP escription On if the result in the accumulator is zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. K JMP V cc. cc. E OR cc. G E H V F V G L Range aaa See memory map See memory map FFFFFFFF I V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

187 hapter : Standard RLL - Logical Instructions S HPP Exclusive Or (XOR) The Exclusive Or instruction is a bit instruction that performs an exclusive or of the value in the lower bits of XOR the accumulator and a specified V-memory location (aaa). aaa The result resides in the in the accumulator. The discrete status flag indicates if the result of the XOR is zero. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is exclusive ored with V using the Exclusive Or instruction. The value in the lower bits of the accumulator are output to V using the Out instruction. irectsoft SOFT X L Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX L NST X SET iscrete it Flags SP SP V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator XOR V XOR the value in the accumulator with the value in V V opy the lower bits of the accumulator to V X SET Q OR V N V N escription On if the result in the accumulator is zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. The upper bits of the accumulator will be set to V cc. cc. XOR (V) cc. V N G V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

188 hapter : Standard RLL - Logical Instructions S HPP Exclusive Or ouble (XOR) The Exclusive OR ouble is a bit instruction that performs an exclusive or of the value in the accumulator XOR and the value (aaa), which is either two consecutive K aaa V-memory locations or an digit (max.) constant. The result resides in the accumulator. iscrete status flags indicate if the result of the Exclusive Or ouble is zero or a negative number (the most significant bit is on). Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K FFFFFFFF irectsoft irect SOFT X NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is exclusively ored with using the Exclusive Or ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. L Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX L NST X SET G Q OR V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator XOR K XOR the value in the accumulator with the constant value V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V E iscrete it Flags SP SP H G K JMP V cc. cc. V E XOR cc. escription On if the result in the accumulator is zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. I V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

189 hapter : Standard RLL - Logical Instructions S HPP ompare (MP) The compare instruction is a bit instruction that compares the value in the lower bits of the accumulator with the value in a specified V-memory location (aaa). The corresponding status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map iscrete it Flags SP SP SP MP aaa escription On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value. On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value. On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value. NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example when X is on, the constant will be loaded into the lower bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is compared with the value in V using the ompare instruction. The corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in the accumulator is less than the value specified in the ompare instruction, SP will turn on energizing. irectsoft irect SOFT X SP L K Load the constant value into the lower bits of the accumulator MP Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR L NST M ORST $ STR GX V ompare the value in the accumulator with the value in V SP STRN P V G K JMP E F The unused accumulator bits are set to zero cc. ONSTNT???? G ompared with V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

190 hapter : Standard RLL - Logical Instructions S HPP ompare ouble (MP) The ompare ouble instruction is a bit instruction that compares the value in the accumulator with the value (aaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an digit (max.) constant. The corresponding status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K FFFFFFFF iscrete it Flags SP SP SP MP aaa NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example when X is on, the value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is compared with the value in V and V using the MP instruction. The corresponding discrete status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in the accumulator is less than the value specified in the ompare instruction, SP will turn on energizing. irectsoft SOFT X SP Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR $ STR GX L NST escription On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value. On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value. On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value. L V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator MP V ompare the value in the accumulator with the value in V and V M ORST SP STRN P V G cc. V ompared with V? V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

191 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions Math Instructions S HPP dd () dd is a bit instruction that adds a value in the accumulator with a value in a V-memory location (aaa). The result resides in the accumulator. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map iscrete it Flags SP SP SP SP SP aaa escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when the bit addition instruction results in a carry. On when the bit addition instruction results in a carry. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when a instruction is executed and a NON number was encountered. NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower bits of the accumulator are added to the value in V using the dd instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V using the Out instruction. irectsoft SOFT X L V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator V dd the value in the lower bits of the accumulator with the value in V V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX L NST V N V The unused accumulator bits are set to zero + cc. G V (ccumulator) (V) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

192 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP dd ouble () dd ouble is a bit instruction that adds the value in the accumulator with a value (aaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an digit (max.) constant. The result resides in the accumulator. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K aaa NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is added with the value in V and V using the dd ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irect SOFT X L V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator V dd the value in the accumulator with the value in V and V V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX iscrete it Flags L NST SP SP SP SP SP V N V V + cc. V escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when the bit addition instruction results in a carry. On when the bit addition instruction results in a carry. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when a instruction is executed and a NON number was encountered. G V (ccumulator) (V and V) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

193 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP Subtract (SU) Subtract is a bit instruction that subtracts the value (aaa) in a V-memory location from the value in the lower bits of the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map iscrete it Flags SP SP SP SP SP NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V is subtracted from the value in the accumulator using the Subtract instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V using the Out instruction. irectsoft SOFT X L V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator SU V Subtract the value in V from the value in the lower bits of the accumulator V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX L NST S RST U ISG V N _ cc. V The unused accumulator bits are set to zero V N V G SU (ccumulator) (V) aaa escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when the bit addition instruction results in a borrow On when the bit addition instruction results in a borrow On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when a instruction is executed and a NON number was encountered. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

194 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP Subtract ouble (SU) Subtract ouble is a bit instruction that subtracts the value (aaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an - digit (max.) constant, from the value in the accumulator. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K iscrete it Flags SP SP SP SP SP SU aaa escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when the bit addition instruction results in a borrow On when the bit addition instruction results in a borrow On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when a instruction is executed and a NON number was encountered. NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The value in V and V is subtracted from the value in the accumulator. The value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irect SOFT X L V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator SU V The in V and V is subtracted from the value in the accumulator V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR L NST GX S RST U ISG. V V (ccumulator) _ (V and V) V V G L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

195 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP Multiply (MUL) Multiply is a bit instruction that multiplies the MUL value (aaa), which is either a V-memory location or a aaa digit (max.) constant, by the value in the lower bits of the accumulator The result can be up to digits and resides in the accumulator. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K iscrete it Flags SP SP SP NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V is multiplied by the value in the accumulator. The value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irectsoft SOFT X L Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX L NST M ORST V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator MUL V The value in V is multiplied by the value in the accumulator V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V U ISG escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when a instruction is executed and a NON number was encountered. L NST The unused accumulator bits are set to zero X cc. V V G V (ccumulator) (V) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

196 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP Multiply ouble (MUL) Multiply ouble is a bit instruction that multiplies the - digit value in the accumulator by the -digit value in the two consecutive V-memory locations specified in MUL the instruction. The lower digits of the results reside in the aaa accumulator. Upper digits of the result reside in the accumulator stack. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map iscrete it Flags SP SP SP NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. In the following example, when X is on, the constant Kbce hex will be loaded into the accumulator. When converted to the number is. That number is stored in V and V. fter loading the constant K into the accumulator, we multiply it times, which is. irectsoft SOFT isplay X L Kbce V L K MUL V V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX GX L NST L NST M ORST U ISG L NST PREV escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when a instruction is executed and a NON number was encountered. Load the hex equivalent of decimal into the accumulator. onvert the value to format. It will occupy eight digits ( bits). Output the number to X V and V using the instruction. cc. Load the constant K into the accumulator. Multiply the accumulator contents () by the -digit number in V and V. Move the result in the accumulator to V and V using the instruction. PREV E E E V V G V V E (ccumulator) (ccumulator) E L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

197 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP ivide (IV) ivide is a bit instruction that divides the value in the accumulator by a value (aaa), which is either a V-memory location or a -digit (max.) constant. The first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the first stack location. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K iscrete it Flags SP SP SP SP NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator will be divided by the value in V using the ivide instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V using the Out instruction. irectsoft SOFT X L Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX L NST IV aaa escription On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when a instruction is executed and a NON number was encountered. V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator IV V The value in the accumulator is divided by the value in V V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V I V N V N V The unused accumulator bits are set to zero cc. G V (ccumulater) V First stak location contains the remainder L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

198 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP ivide ouble (IV) ivide ouble is a bit instruction that divides the value in the accumulator by a value (aaa), which must be obtained from two consecutive V-memory locations. (You cannot use a constant as the parameter in the box.) The first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the first stack location. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map iscrete it Flags SP SP SP SP NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. IV aaa In the following example, when X is on, the value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is divided by the value in V and V using the ivide ouble instruction. The first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator an the remainder resides in the first stack location. The value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irectsoft X L Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR E V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator IV V The value in the accumulator is divided by the value in V and V V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V E F escription On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when a instruction is executed and a NON number was encountered. L NST The unused accumulator bits are set to zero GX cc. I (ccumulator) V V V V N V (V and V) First stack location contains the remainder L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

199 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP S HPP Increment (IN) The Increment instruction increments a value in a specified V-memory location by each time the instruction is executed. ecrement (E) The ecrement instruction decrements a value in a specified V-memory location by each time the instruction is executed. NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. irectsoft SOFT IN V Increment the value in V by. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR I NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT N TMR aaa In the following increment example, when is on the value in V increases by one. F E IN E Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map iscrete it Flags SP SP irectsoft SOFT V V aaa escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when a instruction is executed and a NON number was encountered. E V ecrement the value in V by. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT E F E V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

200 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP S HPP Increment inary (IN) The Increment inary instruction increments a binary value in a specified V-memory location by each time the instruction is executed. In the following example when is on, the binary value in V is increased by. irect SOFT IN V Increment the binary value in the accumulator by Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ecrement inary (E) The ecrement inary instruction decrements a binary value in a specified V-memory location by each time the instruction is executed. V V IN aaa Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example when is on, the value in V is decreased by. irect SOFT iscrete it Flags SP irectsoft Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map iscrete it Flags SP irectsoft E V ecrement the binary value in the accumulator by escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. V V $ STR I N TMR Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR E escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. F F E aaa L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

201 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP dd inary () dd inary is a bit instruction that adds the binary value in the lower bits of the accumulator with a binary value (aaa), which is either a V-memory location or a -bit constant. The result can be up to bits and resides in the accumulator. iscrete it Flags SP SP SP SP SP NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. aaa Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K FFFF escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when the bit addition instruction results in a carry. On when the bit addition instruction results in a carry. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator will be added to the binary value in V using the dd inary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irectsoft X L V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator V V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Use either OR onstant V-memory The binary value in the accumulator is added to the binary value in V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V and V L K IN The unused accumulator bits are set to zero + cc. (ccumulator) (V) STR X(IN) L V V V V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

202 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP Subtract inary (SU) Subtract inary is a bit instruction that subtracts the binary value (aaa), which is either a V-memory location or a -digit (max.) binary constant, from the binary value in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator. NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. SU aaa Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K FFFF iscrete it Flags SP SP SP SP In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in V is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract inary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V using the Out instruction. irectsoft isplay X L V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator SU V The binary value in V is subtracted from the value in the accumulator V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On when the bit addition instruction results in a borrow On when the bit addition instruction results in a borrow On any time the value in the accumulator is negative. Use either OR onstant V-memory L K The unused accumulator bits are set to zero (ccumulator) - (V) cc. STR X(IN) L V S U V IN V V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

203 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP Multiply inary (MUL) Multiply inary is a bit instruction that multiplies the binary value (aaa), which is either a V-memory location or a -digit (max.) binary constant, by the binary value in the accumulator. The result can be up to bits and resides in the accumulator. NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. MUL aaa In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in V is multiplied by the binary value in the accumulator using the Multiply inary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irectsoft isplay X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes L V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator MUL V The binary value in V is multiplied by the binary value in the accumulator V STR X L V Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K FFFF iscrete it Flags SP SP escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On any time the value in the accumulator is negative. Use either OR onstant V-memory opy the value of the accumulator to V and V L K V IN V The unused accumulator bits are set to zero (ccumulator) x E (V) cc. V V E E M U L V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

204 hapter : Standard RLL - Math Instructions S HPP ivide inary (IV) ivide inary is a bit instruction that divides the binary value in the accumulator by a binary value (aaa), which is IV either a V-memory location or a -bit (max.) binary aaa constant. The first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the first stack location. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map onstant K FFFF NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is divided by the binary value in V using the ivide inary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V using the Out instruction. irectsoft isplay X iscrete it Flags SP SP SP L V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator IV V The binary value in th accumulator is divided by the binary value in V V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Use either OR onstant V-memory escription On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with. On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. L K IN The unused accumulator bits are set to zero F F (ccumulator) (V) cc. First stack location contains the remainder V STR X L V I V V _.. V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

205 hapter : Standard RLL - it Operation Instructions it Operation Instructions S HPP Sum (SUM) The Sum instruction counts number of bits that are set to in the accumulator. The HEX result resides in the accumulator. In the following example, when X is on, the value formed by discrete locations X X is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The number of bits in the accumulator set to is counted using the Sum instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V using the Out instruction. irectsoft SOFT isplay X $ STR GX L NST S RST iscrete it Flags SP LF K X Load the value represented by discrete locations X X into the accumulator SUM Sum the number of bits in the accumulator set to V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes PREV F U ISG PREV M ORST PREV The unused accumulator bits are set to zero SUM escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. X X X X X X X X ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON cc. F I cc. V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

206 hapter : Standard RLL - it Operation Instructions S HPP Shift Left (SHFL) Shift Left is a bit instruction that shifts the bits in the accumulator a specified number (aaa) of places to the left. The vacant positions are filled with zeros and the bits shifted out of the accumulator are discarded. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is shifted bits to the left using the Shift Left instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irectsoft SOFT X L V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator SHFL K The bit pattern in the accumulator is shifted bit positions to the left V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map onstant K - iscrete it Flags SP SP L NST S RST H F escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. L NST cc. Shifted out of the accumulator cc. V V V SHFL aaa V.... L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

207 hapter : Standard RLL - it Operation Instructions S HPP Shift Right (SHFR) Shift Right is a bit instruction that shifts the bits in the accumulator a specified number (aaa) of places to the right. The vacant positions are filled with zeros and the bits shifted out of the accumulator are lost. Operand ata Type L Range SHFR aaa In the following example, when X is on, the value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is shifted bits to the right using the Shift Right instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irectsoft irect SOFT X L V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator SHFR K The bit pattern in the accumulator is shifted bit positions to the right V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX aaa V-memory V See memory map onstant K - iscrete it Flags SP SP L NST S RST H F escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. R ORN cc..... cc. V onstant V V V Shifted out of the accumulator L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

208 hapter : Standard RLL - it Operation Instructions S HPP Encode (ENO) The Encode instruction encodes the bit position in the accumulator having a value of, and returns the appropriate binary representation. If the most significant bit is set to (it ), the Encode instruction would place the value HEX F (decimal ) in the accumulator. If the value to be encoded is or, the instruction will place a zero in the accumulator. If the value to be encoded has more than one bit position set to a, the least significant will be encoded and SP will be set on. ENO NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. In the following example, when X is on, The value in V is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The bit position set to a in the accumulator is encoded to the corresponding bit binary value using the Encode instruction. The value in the lower bits of the accumulator is copied to V using the Out instruction. irectsoft irect SOFT X L Handheld Programmer Keystrokes GX iscrete it Flags SP SP V Load the value in V into the lower bits of the accumulator ENO $ STR L NST E N TMR Encode the bit position set to in the accumulator to a bit binary value V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V V N O INST# escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. cc. cc. it postion is converted to binary V V inary value for. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

209 hapter : Standard RLL - it Operation Instructions S HPP ecode (EO) The ecode instruction decodes a bit binary value of ( F HEX) in the accumulator by setting the appropriate bit EO position to a. If the accumulator contains the value F (HEX), bit will be set in the accumulator. If the value to be decoded is greater than, the number is divided by until the value is less than and then the value is decoded. In the following example when X is on, the value formed by discrete locations X X is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The five bit binary pattern in the accumulator is decoded by setting the corresponding bit position to a using the ecode instruction. irectsoft irect SOFT X LF K Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR L NST E X Load the value in represented by discrete locations X X into the accumulator EO ecode the five bit binary pattern in the accumulator and set the corresponding bit position to a F O INST# cc. cc. F X X X X X OFF ON OFF ON ON The binary vlaue is converted to bit position. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

210 hapter : Standard RLL - Number onversion Instructions Number onversion Instructions (ccumulator) St d d RLL S HPP GX inary (IN) IN The inary instruction converts a value in the accumulator to the equivalent binary value. The result resides in the accumulator. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V and V is loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is converted to the binary (HEX) equivalent using the IN instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. (The handheld programmer will display the binary value in V and V as a HEX value.) irectsoft X L IN V V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR L NST I N TMR iscrete it Flags SP SP SP Load the value in V and V into the accumulator onvert the value in the accumulator to the binary equivalent value opy the binary data in the accumulator to V and V escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. On when a instruction is executed and a NON number was encountered. cc. cc. V V Value F V V = inary Equivalent Value The inary (HEX) value copied to V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

211 hapter : Standard RLL - Number onversions Instructions S HPP inary oded ecimal () The inary oded ecimal instruction converts a binary value in the accumulator to the equivalent value. The result resides in the accumulator. In the following example, when X is on, the binary (HEX) value in V and V is loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is converted to the equivalent value using the instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irectsoft X L V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator onvert the binary value in the accumulator to the equivalent value V opythevalueinthe accumulator to V and V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR L NST GX iscrete it Flags SP SP escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. inary Value V V F cc. cc. Equivalent Value = V V The value copied to V and V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

212 hapter : Standard RLL - Number onversions Instructions S HPP Invert (INV) The Invert instruction inverts or takes the one s INV complement of the bit value in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator. In the following example, when X is on, the value in V and V will be loaded into the accumulator using the Load ouble instruction. The value in the accumulator is inverted using the Invert instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V and V using the Out ouble instruction. irectsoft irect SOFT X L V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator INV Invert the binary bit pattern in the accumulator V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR L NST GX I N TMR V N V V cc. cc. F F F F V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

213 hapter : Standard RLL - Number onversion Instructions S HPP SII to HEX (TH) The SII TO HEX instruction converts a table of SII values to a specified table of HEX values. SII values are two digits and their HEX equivalents are one digit. This TH means an SII table of four V-memory locations would Vaaa only require two V-memory locations for the equivalent HEX table. The function parameters are loaded into the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program an SII to HEX table function. The example on the following page shows a program for the SII to HEX table function. Step : Load the number of V-memory locations for the SII table into the first level of the accumulator stack. Step : Load the starting V-memory location for the SII table into the accumulator. This parameter must be a HEX value. Step : Specify the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the HEX table in the TH instruction. Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the L instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator. Operand ata Type V-memory V iscrete it Flags SP L Range aaa See memory map escription On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with. In the example on the following page, when X is ON the constant (K) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction and will be placed in the first level of the accumulator stack when the next Load instruction is executed. The starting location for the SII table (V) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load ddress instruction. The starting location for the HEX table (V) is specified in the SII to HEX instruction. The table below lists valid SII values for TH conversion. SII Values Valid for TH onversion SII Value HEX Value SII Value HEX Value E F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

214 hapter : Standard RLL - Number onversion Instructions S HPP irectsoft SOFT X L K L O TH V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR L NST L NST T MLR H Load the constant value into the lower bits of the accumulator. This value defines the number of V memory location in the SII table onvert octal to HEX and load the value into the accumulator V is the starting location for the HEX table PREV E E G SII TLE Hexadecimal Equivalents HEX to SII (HT) The HEX to SII instruction converts a table of HT HEX values to a specified table of SII values. Vaaa HEX values are one digit and their SII equivalents are two digits. This means a HEX table of two V-memory locations would require four V-memory locations for the equivalent SII table. The function parameters are loaded into the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program a HEX to SII table function. The example on the following page shows a program for the HEX to SII table function. Step : Load the number of V-memory locations in the HEX table into the first level of the accumulator stack. Step : Load the starting V-memory location for the HEX table into the accumulator. This parameter must be a HEX value. Step : Specify the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the SII table in the HT instruction. Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the L instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator. V V V V V V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

215 hapter : Standard RLL - Number onversion Instructions In the following example, when X is ON the constant (K) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. The starting location for the HEX table (V) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load ddress instruction. The starting location for the SII table (V) is specified in the HEX to SII instruction. irectsoft SOFT X L Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR Operand ata Type V-memory V iscrete it Flags SP L NST L NST H K Load the constant value into the lower bits of the accumulator. This value defines the number of V locations in the HEX table. L O onvert octal to HEX and load the value into the accumulator HT V V is the starting location for the SII table. The conversion is executed by this instruction. T MLR V V Hexadecimal Equivalents The table below lists valid SII values for HT conversion. K JMP E F E L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev. L Range aaa See memory map escription On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with. SII TLE V V V V SII Values Valid for HT onversion Hex Value SII Value Hex Value SII Value E F

216 hapter : Standard RLL - Number onversion Instructions S HPP Gray ode (GRY) The Gray code instruction converts a bit gray code value to a value. The conversion requires bits of the accumulator. The upper bits are set to. This instruction is designed for use with devices (typically encoders) that use the grey code numbering GRY scheme. The Gray ode instruction will directly convert a gray code number to a number for devices having a resolution of or counts per revolution. If a device having a resolution of counts per revolution is to be used you must subtract a value of from the converted value to obtain the proper result. For a device having a resolution of counts per revolution you must subtract a value of. In the following example, when X is ON the binary value represented by X X is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The gray code value in the accumulator is converted to using the Gray ode instruction. The value in the lower bits of the accumulator is copied to V. irectsoft SOFT X LF Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX L NST G X K Load the value represented by X X into the lower bits of the accumulator GRY onvert the bit grey code value in the accumulator to a value V opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V iscrete it Flags SP SP R ORN F V N Y MLS escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. Gray ode X X X ON OFF ON cc. cc. G X X X OFF OFF OFF V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

217 hapter : Standard RLL - Number onversion Instructions S HPP Shuffle igits (SFLGT) The Shuffle igits instruction shuffles a maximum of SFLGT digits rearranging them in a specified order. This function requires parameters to be loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator with two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to use the shuffle digit function. The example on the following page shows a program for the Shuffle igits function. Step : Load the value (digits) to be shuffled into the first level of the accumulator stack. Step : Load the order that the digits will be shuffled to into the accumulator. Step : Insert the SFLGT instruction. NOTE: If the number used to specify the order contains a or F, the corresponding position will be set to. iscrete it Flags SP SP Shuffle igits lock iagram There are a maximum of digits that can be shuffled. The bit positions in the first level of the accumulator stack defines the digits to be shuffled. They correspond to the bit positions in the accumulator that define the order the digits will be shuffled. The digits are shuffled and the result resides in the accumulator. escription On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero. On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative. it Positions igits to be shuffled (first stack location) E F Specified order (accumulator) E F Result (accumulator) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

218 hapter : Standard RLL - Number onversion Instructions In the following example when X is on, The value in the first level of the accumulator stack will be reorganized in the order specified by the value in the accumulator. Example shows how the shuffle digits works when or F is not used when specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled. lso, there are no duplicate numbers in the specified order. Example shows how the shuffle digits works when a or F is used when specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle igits instruction is executed, the bit positions in the first stack location that had a corresponding or F in the accumulator (order specified) are set to. Example shows how the shuffle digits works when duplicate numbers are used specifying the order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle igits instruction is executed, the most significant duplicate number in the order specified is used in the result. irectsoft SOFT X L Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX L NST L NST S RST V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator L V Load the value in V and V into the accumulator SFLGT Shuf fle the digits in the first level of the accumulator stack based on the pattern in the accumulator. The result is in the accumulator. V opy the value in the accumulator to V and V F L NST V V E F V V E F V V cc. V F E V V V V E V cc. V V V V E F Original bit Positions E F cc. F E cc. E F cc. Specified order V New bit Positions E F cc. E cc. cc. G T MLR G V cc. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

219 hapter : Standard RLL - Table Instructions Table Instructions S HPP Move (MOV) MOV The Move instruction moves the values from a V-memory V aaa table to another V-memory table the same length (a table is a consecutive group of V-memory locations). The function parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions. The MOV instruction can be used to write data to non-volatile V- memory (see ppendix F). Listed below are the steps necessary to program the MOV function. Step : Load the number of V-memory locations to be moved into the first level of the accumulator stack. This parameter is a HEX value (K max, octal). Step : Load the starting V-memory location for the locations to be moved into the accumulator. This parameter is a HEX value. Step : Insert the MOVE instruction which specifies starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the destination table. Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the L instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map Pointer P See memory map In the following example, when X is on, the constant value (K) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first stack location after the Load ddress instruction is executed. The octal address (V), the starting location for the source table is loaded into the accumulator. The destination table location (V) is specified in the Move instruction. irectsoft SOFT X Load the constant value L (HEX) into the lower bits K of the accumulator L O MOV V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR iscrete it Flags SP L NST L NST M ORST O INST# V N escription On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with. onvert octal to HEX and load the value into the accumulator opy the specified table locations to a table beginning at location V K JMP G V V V V V V X X X X V X X X X V X X X X V X X X X V V V V V V V X X X X V X X X X V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

220 hapter : Standard RLL - Table Instructions S HPP Move Memory artridge (MOVM) and Load Label (LLL) The Move Memory artridge and the Load Label instructions are used to copy data from program ladder memory to V-memory. The Load Label instruction is used with the MOVM instruction when copying data from program ladder memory to V-memory. To copy data from the program ladder memory to V-memory, the function parameters are loaded into the first two levels of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Move Memory artridge and Load Label functions. MOVM V aaa LLL K aaa Step : Load the number of words to be copied into the second level of the accumulator stack. Step : Load the offset for the data label area in ladder memory and the beginning of the V-memory block into the first level of the stack. Step : Load the source data label (LLL Kaaa) into the accumulator when copying data from ladder memory to V-memory. This is the source location of the value. Step : Insert the MOVM instruction which specifies destination in V-memory (Vaaa). This is the copy destination. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

221 hapter : Standard RLL - Table Instructions opy ata From a ata Label rea to V-memory In the example to the right, data is copied from a ata Label rea to V-memory. When X is on, the constant value (K) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the second stack location after the next Load and Load Label (LLL) instructions are executed. The constant value (K) is loaded into the accumulator, specifying the offset for the source and destination data. It is placed in the first stack location after the LLL instruction is executed. The source address where data is being copied from is loaded into the accumulator using the LLL instruction. The MOVM instruction specifies the destination starting location and executes the copying of data from the ata Label rea to V-memory. ata label area programmed after the EN instruction LL N O N K N O N K N O N K K N O N Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR L NST L NST L NST M ORST K O INST# L NST V N.. X X X X.. M ORST K JMP K JMP L NST V V V V V E irectsoft irect SOFT X L K Load the value into the accumulator specifying the number of locations to be copied. L K Load the value into the accumulator specifying the offset for source and destination locations LLL K Load the value into the accumulator specifying the ata Label rea K as the starting address of the data to be copied. MOVM V V is the destination starting address for the data to be copied. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

222 hapter : Standard RLL - PU ontrol Instructions PU ontrol Instructions No Operation (NOP) The No Operation is an empty (not programmed) memory location. S HPP N/ irectsoft S HPP S HPP End (EN) The End instruction marks the termination point of the normal program scan. n End instruction is required at the end of the main N/ program body. If the End instruction is omitted an error will occur and the PU will not enter the Run Mode. ata labels, subroutines and interrupt routines are placed after the End instruction. The End instruction is not conditional; therefore, no input contact is allowed. irectsoft EN Handheld Programmer Keystrokes E N TMR Stop (STOP) The Stop instruction changes the operational mode of the PU from Run to Program (Stop) mode. This instruction is typically N/ used to stop PL operation in an error condition. In the following example, when turns on, the PU will stop operation and switch to the program mode. irectsoft iscrete it Flags SP SP NOP STOP Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR Handheld Programmer Keystrokes S RST N TMR O INST# T MLR escription On when the L goes into the TERM_PRG mode. On when the L goes into the PRG mode. P V O INST# P V NOP EN STOP L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

223 hapter : Standard RLL - PU ontrol Instructions S HPP Reset Watch og Timer (RSTWT) The Reset Watch og Timer instruction resets the PU scan timer. The default setting for the watch dog timer is ms. N/ Scan times very seldom exceed ms, but it is possible. RSTWT For/next loops, subroutines, interrupt routines, and table instructions can be programmed such that the scan becomes longer than ms. When instructions are used in a manner that could exceed the watch dog timer setting, this instruction can be used to reset the timer. software timeout error (E) will occur and the PU will enter the program mode if the scan time exceeds the watch dog timer setting. Placement of the RSTWT instruction in the program is very important. The instruction has to be executed before the scan time exceeds the watch dog timer s setting. If the scan time is consistently longer than the watch dog timer s setting, the timeout value may be permanently increased from the default value of ms by UX on the HPP or the appropriate auxiliary function in your programming package. This eliminates the need for the RSTWT instruction. In the following example the PU scan timer will be reset to when the RSTWT instruction is executed. See the For/Next instruction for a detailed example. irectsoft RSTWT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes R ORN S RST T MLR W NN T MLR L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

224 hapter : Standard RLL - Program ontrol Instructions Program ontrol Instructions S HPP For / Next (FOR) (NEXT) The For and Next instructions are used to execute a section of ladder logic between the For and Next instruction a specified numbers of times. When the For instruction is enabled, the program will loop the specified number of times. If the For instruction is not energized the section of ladder logic between the For and Next instructions is not executed. For / Next instructions cannot be nested. The normal I/O update and PU housekeeping is suspended while executing the For / Next loop. The program scan can increase significantly, depending on the amount of times the logic between the For and Next instruction is executed. With the exception of immediate I/O instructions, I/O will not be updated until the program execution is completed for that scan. epending on the length of time required to complete the program execution, it may be necessary to reset the watch dog timer inside of the For / Next loop using the RSTWT instruction. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map onstant K - aaa FOR NEXT L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

225 hapter : Standard RLL - Program ontrol Instructions In the following example, when X is on, the application program inside the For / Next loop will be executed three times. If X is off the program inside the loop will not be executed. The immediate instructions may or may not be necessary depending on your application. lso, The RSTWT instruction is not necessary if the For / Next loop does not extend the scan time larger the Watch og Timer setting. For more information on the Watch og Timer, refer to the RSTWT instruction. irectsoft irect SOFT X X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR $ STR GX F R ORN N TMR O INST# S RST I F E R ORN T MLR X SET K FOR RSTWT Y NEXT W NN T MLR T MLR L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

226 hapter : Standard RLL - Program ontrol Instructions S HPP S HPP S HPP Goto Subroutine (GTS) (SR) The Goto Subroutine instruction allows a section of ladder logic to be placed outside the main body of the program K aaa execute only when needed. There can be a maximum of GTS GTS instructions and SR instructions used in a program. The GTS instructions can be nested up to levels. n error E will occur if the maximum limits are exceeded. Typically this will be used in an application where a block of program logic may be slow to execute and is not required to execute every scan. The subroutine label and all associated logic is placed after the End statement in the program. When the subroutine is called from the main program, the PU will execute the subroutine (SR) with the same constant number (K) as the GTS instruction which called the subroutine. SR K aaa y placing code in a subroutine it is only scanned and executed when needed since it resides after the End instruction. ode which is not scanned does not impact the overall scan time of the program. Operand ata Type L Range aaa onstant K -FFFF Subroutine Return (RT) When a Subroutine Return is executed in the subroutine the PU will return to the point in the main body of the program from which it was called. The Subroutine Return is used as termination of the subroutine which must be the last instruction in the subroutine and is a stand alone instruction (no input contact on the rung). Subroutine Return onditional (RT) The Subroutine Return onditional instruction is a optional instruction used with a input contact to implement a conditional return from the subroutine. The Subroutine Return (RT) is still required for termination of the Subroutine. RT RT L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

227 hapter : Standard RLL - Program ontrol Instructions In the following example, when X is on, Subroutine K will be called. The PU will jump to the Subroutine Label K and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed. If X is on the PU will return to the main program at the RT instruction. If X is not on Y Y will be reset to off and then the PU will return to the main body of the program. irectsoft SOFT isplay SR K X X X X X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR?? $ STR GX $ STR GX $ STR SP STRN S RST G E S RST R ORN R ORN T MLR N TMR I I I I I T MLR I I T MLR S RST R ORN F L F K GTS K EN Y I Y I RT Y Y RSTI F RT H L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

228 hapter : Standard RLL - Program ontrol Instructions In the following example, when X is on, Subroutine K will be called. The PU will jump to the Subroutine Label K and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed. The PU will return to the main body of the program after the RT instruction is executed. irectsoft SR K X X X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR $ STR GX $ STR GX G E S RST R ORN T MLR N TMR I I F T MLR S RST R ORN K GTS EN Y Y RT L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

229 hapter : Standard RLL - Program ontrol Instructions S HPP S HPP Master Line Set (MLS) The Master Line Set instruction allows the program to control sections of ladder logic by forming a new power rail controlled by the main left power rail. The main left rail is always master line. When a MLS K instruction is used, a new power rail is created at level. Master Line Sets and Master Line Resets can be used to nest power rails up to seven levels deep. K aaa MLS Operand ata Type L Range aaa onstant K - Master Line Reset (MLR) The Master Line Reset instruction marks the end of control K aaa for the corresponding MLS instruction. The MLR reference MLR is one less than the corresponding MLS. Understanding Master ontrol Relays Operand ata Type L Range aaa onstant K - The Master Line Set (MLS) and Master Line Reset (MLR) instructions allow you to quickly enable (or disable) sections of the RLL program. This provides program control flexibility. The following example shows how the MLS and MLR instructions operate by creating a sub power rail for control logic. irectsoft irect SOFT X X X X X K MLS Y K MLS Y K MLR K MLR Y When contact X is ON, logic under the first MLS will be executed. When contact X and X are ON, logic under the second MLS will be executed. The MLR instructions note the end of the Master ontrol area. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

230 hapter : Standard RLL - Program ontrol Instructions MLS/MLR Example In the following MLS/MLR example logic between the first MLS K () and MLR K () will function only if input X is on. The logic between the MLS K () and MLR K () will function only if input X and X is on. The last rung is not controlled by either of the MLS coils. irectsoft irectsoft X X X X X X X X X X K MLS Y K MLS Y Y K MLR Y K MLR Y Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR Y MLS $ STR GX $ STR GX $ STR GX $ STR Y MLS $ STR GX $ STR GX T MLR $ STR GX $ STR GX T MLR $ STR GX F E F G H E L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

231 hapter : Standard RLL - Interrupt Instructions Interrupt Instructions S HPP S HPP S HPP S HPP Interrupt (INT) The Interrupt instruction allows a section of ladder INT O aaa logic to be placed below the main body of the program and executed only when needed. High-Speed I/O Modes,, and can generate an interrupt. With INT Mode, you may select an external interrupt (input X), or a time-based interrupt ( ms). Typically, interrupts are used in an application when a fast response to an input is needed or a program section must execute faster than the normal PU scan. The interrupt label and all associated logic must be placed after the End statement in the program. When an interrupt occurs, the PU will complete execution of the current instruction it is processing in ladder logic, then execute the interrupt routine. fter interrupt routine execution, the ladder program resumes from the point at which it was interrupted. See hapter, the section on Mode (Interrupt) Operation for more details on interrupt configuration. In the L, only one hardware interrupt is available. Operand ata Type L Range onstant O, Interrupt Return (IRT) n Interrupt Return is normally executed as the last instruction in the interrupt routine. It returns the PU to the point in the main program from which it was called. The Interrupt Return is a stand-alone instruction (no input contact on the rung). IRT Interrupt Return onditional (IRT) The Interrupt Return onditional instruction is a optional instruction used with an input contact to implement a conditional return from the interrupt routine. The Interrupt Return is required to terminate the interrupt routine. IRT Enable Interrupts (ENI) The Enable Interrupt instruction is placed in the main ladder program (before the End instruction), enabling the interrupt. The interrupt remains enabled until the program executes a isable Interrupt ENI instruction. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

232 hapter : Standard RLL - Interrupt Instructions S HPP INT isable Interrupts (ISI) isable Interrupt instruction in the main body of the application program (before the End instruction) will disable ISI the interrupt (either external or timed). The interrupt remains disabled until the program executes an Enable Interrupt instruction. External Interrupt Program Example In the following example, we do some initialization on the first scan, using the first-scan contact SP. The interrupt feature is the HSIO Mode. Then we configure X as the external interrupt by writing to its configuration register, V. See hapter, Mode Operation for more details. uring program execution, when X is on the interrupt is enabled. When X is off the interrupt will be disabled. When an interrupt signal (X) occurs the PU will jump to the interrupt label INT O. The application ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be performed. The PU will return to the main body of the program after the IRT instruction is executed. irectsoft SP O X X X X L L K V K V ENI ISI EN Y SETI Y SETI IRT Load the constant value (K) into the lower bits of the accumulator opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Load the constant value (K) into the lower bits of the accumulator opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX GX $ STR SP STRN $ STR X SET $ STR X SET L NST L NST E E I I N TMR I N TMR N TMR I I I I R ORN SP STRN V N V N I S RST T MLR T MLR H H I F H K JMP G K JMP G E E E L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

233 hapter : Standard RLL - Interrupt Instructions Timed Interrupt Program Example In the following example, we do some initialization on the first scan, using the first-scan contact SP. The interrupt feature is the HSIO Mode. Then we configure the HSIO timer as a ms interrupt by writing K to the configuration register for X (V). See hapter, Mode Operation for more details. When X turns on, the interrupt will be enabled. When X turns off, the interrupt will be disabled. Every ms the PU will jump to the interrupt label INT O. The application ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be performed. If X is not on Y Y will be reset to off and then the PU will return to the main body of the program. irectsoft irect SOFT INT SP O X X X X L L K V K V ENI ISI EN Y SETI Y Y RSTI IRT Load the constant value (K) into the lower bits of the accumulator opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Load the constant value (K) into the lower bits of the accumulator opy the value in the lower bits of the accumulator to V Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR GX $ STR SP STRN $ STR X SET SP STRN X SET L NST Independent Timed Interrupt Interrupt O is also available as an interrupt. This interrupt is independent of the HSIO features. Interrupt O uses an internal timer that is configured in V-memory location V. The interrupt period can be adjusted from to ms. Once the interrupt period is set and the interrupt is enabled in the program, the PU will continuously call the interrupt routine based on the time setting in V. L NST Input onfiguration Register Function Hex ode Required GX V High-Speed Timed Interrupt xxxx (xxxx = timer setting) - ms () E E I I N TMR I I I I I E E N TMR N TMR R ORN V N I V N S RST T MLR T MLR H I H F K JMP G K JMP G E H E E L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, /

234 hapter : Standard RLL - Message Instructions Message Instructions S HPP S HPP Fault (FULT) The Fault instruction is used to display a message on the handheld programmer or in the irectsoft status bar. The message has a maximum of characters and can be either V-memory data, numerical constant data or SII text. To display the value in a V-memory location, specify the V-memory location in the instruction. To display the data in ON (SII constant) or NON (Numerical constant) instructions, specify the constant (K) value for the corresponding data label area. Fault Example In the following example when X is on, the message SW will display on the handheld programmer. The NONs use the HEX SII equivalent of the text to be displayed. (The HEX SII for a blank is, a is, is...) irectsoft irect SOFT LL K X Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V See memory map onstant K -FFFF iscrete it Flags SP FULT K ON SW NON K NON K EN escription On when the FULT instruction is executed Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR F E N TMR N TMR N TMR L NST U ISG O INST# O INST# O INST# L NST L NST N TMR N TMR N TMR T MLR S RST FULT : *SW W NN E FULT aaa G L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

235 hapter : Standard RLL - Message Instructions S HPP S HPP S HPP ata Label (LL) The ata Label instruction marks the beginning of an SII/numeric data area. LLs are programmed after the End statement. maximum of LL instructions can be used in a program. Multiple NONs and ONs can be used in a LL area. SII onstant (ON) The SII onstant instruction is used with the LL instruction to store SII text for use with other instructions. Two SII characters can be stored in an ON instruction. If only one character is stored in an ON a leading space will be inserted. Numerical onstant (NON) The Numerical onstant instruction is used with the LL instruction to store the HEX SII equivalent of numerical data for use with other instructions. Two digits can be stored in an NON instruction. LL Operand ata Type L Range aaa onstant K -FFFF Operand ata Type onstant Operand ata Type onstant K ON aaa L Range aaa - -Z NON K aaa L Range aaa -FFFF K aaa L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

236 hapter : Standard RLL - Message Instructions ata Label Example In the following example, an ON and two NON instructions are used within a LL instruction to build a text message. See the FULT instruction for information on displaying messages. The V- Manual also has information on displaying messages. irectsoft SOFT LL K ON SW NON Handheld Programmer Keystrokes E N TMR N TMR N TMR L NST K NON K O INST# O INST# O INST# L NST N TMR N TMR N TMR EN S RST W NN E G L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

237 hapter : Standard RLL - Message Instructions S HPP Print Message (PRINT) The Print Message instruction prints the embedded text or text/data variable message to the specified, configured, N/ communications port (Port on the L PU). Operand ata Type L Range aaa onstant K You may recall from the PU specifications in hapter that the L s ports are capable of several protocols. Port cannot be configured for the non-sequence protocol. To configure port using the Handheld Programmer, use UX and follow the prompts, making the same choices as indicated below on this page. To configure a port in irectsoft, choose the PL > Setup > Setup Secondary omm Port. Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose Port. Protocol: lick the check box to the left of Non-sequence, and then you ll see the dialog box shown below. aud Rate: hoose the baud rate that matches your printer. Stop its, Parity: hoose number of stop bits and parity setting to match your printer. Memory ddress: hoose a V-memory address to be used by irectsoft to store the port setup information. You will need to reserve words in V-memory for this purpose. NOTE: See hapter for a detail of the non-sequence setup. PRINT aaa Hello, this is a PL message Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the PU, and click lose. Then see hapter for port wiring information, in order to connect your printer to the L. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

238 hapter : Standard RLL - Message Instructions Port on the L has standard RS levels, and should work with most printer serial input connections. Text element this is used for printing character strings. The character strings are defined as the character (more than ) ranged by the double quotation marks. Two hex numbers preceded by the dollar sign means an -bit SII character code. lso, two characters preceded by the dollar sign is interpreted according to the following table: The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the output to the printer. Example: Length without character Length with character Length with blank $ Length with double quotation mark $ R $ L Length with one R and one LF $ $ Length with one R and one LF $ $ Length with one $ mark In printing an ordinary line of text, you will need to include double quotation marks before and after the text string. Error code will occur in the PU when the print instruction contains invalid text or no quotations. It is important to test your PRINT instruction data during the application development. The following example prints the message to port. We use a P contact, which causes the message instruction to be active for just one scan. Note the $N at the end of the message, which produces a carriage return / line feed on the printer. This prepares the printer to print the next line, starting from the left margin. X # haracter code escription $$ ollar sign ($) $ ouble quotation ( ) $L or $l Line feed (LF) $N or $n arriage return line feed (RLF) $P or $p Form feed $R or $r arriage return (R) $T or $t Tab PRINT K Hello, this is a PL message.$n Print the message to Port when X makes an off-to-on transition. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

239 hapter : Standard RLL - Message Instructions V-memory element - this is used for printing V-memory contents in the integer format or real format. Use V-memory number or V-memory number with - and data type. The data types are shown in the table below. The haracter code must be capital letters. NOTE: There must be a space entered before and after the V-memory address to separate it from the text string. Failure to do this will result in an error code. # haracter code escription none -bit binary (decimal number) : digit : -bit binary (decimal number) : digit Example: V Print binary data in V for decimal number V : Print data in V V : Print binary number in V and V for decimal number V : Print data in V and V Example: The following example prints a message containing text and a variable. The reactor temperature labels the data, which is at V. You can use the : qualifier after the V if the data is in format, for example. The final string adds the units of degrees to the line of text, and the $N adds a carriage return / line feed. X PRINT K Reactor temperature = V deg. $N Message will read: Reactor temperature = deg Print the message to Port when X makes an off-to-on transition. represents a space V-memory text element This is used for printing text stored in V-memory. Use the % followed by the number of characters after V-memory number for representing the text. If you assign as the number of characters, the print function will read the character count from the first location. Then it will start at the next V-memory location and read that number of SII codes for the text from memory. Example: V % characters in V to V are printed. V % The characters in V to Vxxxx (determined by the number in V) will be printed. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

240 hapter : Standard RLL - Message Instructions it element this is used for printing the state of the designated bit in V-memory or a relay bit. The bit element can be assigned by the designating point (.) and bit number preceded by the V-memory number or relay number. The output type is described as shown in the table below. # ata format escription none Print for an ON state, and for an OFF state : OOL Print TRUE for an ON state, and FLSE for an OFF state : ONOFF Print ON for an ON state, and OFF for an OFF state Example: V. Prints the status of bit in V, in / format Prints the status of in / format : OOL Prints the status of in TRUE/FLSE format : ON/OFF Prints the status of in ON/OFF format V. : OOL Prints the status of bit in V in TRUE/FLSE format The maximum numbers of characters you can print is. The number of characters for each element is listed in the table below: Element Type Maximum haracters Text, character bit binary bit binary digit digit Floating point (real number) Floating point (real with exponent) V-memory/text it (/ format) it (TRUE/FLSE format) it (ON/OFF format) The handheld programmer s mnemonic is PRINT, followed by the EF field. Special relay flags SP and SP indicate the status of the L PU ports (busy, or communications error). See the appendix on special relays for a description. NOTE: You must use the appropriate special relay in conjunction with the PRINT command to ensure the ladder program does not try to PRINT to a port that is still busy from a previous PRINT or WX or RX instruction. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

241 hapter : Standard RLL - Intelligent I/O Instructions Intelligent I/O Instructions S HPP Read from Intelligent Module (R) The Read from Intelligent Module instruction reads a block of data (- bytes maximum) from an intelligent I/O module R into the PU s V-memory. It loads the function parameters into V aaa the first and second level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional instructions. Listed below are the steps to program the Read from Intelligent module function. Step : Load the base number (-) into the first byte and the slot number (-) into the second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack. Step : Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator stack (maximum of bytes). Step : Load the address from which the data will be read into the accumulator. This parameter must be a HEX value. Step : Insert the R instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) where the data will be read into. Helpful Hint: Use the L instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent and load it into the accumulator when the HEX format is required. Operand ata Type L Range V-memory V NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. In the following example when X is ON, the R instruction will read six bytes of data from a intelligent module in base, slot starting at address in the intelligent module and copy the information into V-memory loacations V-V. irect SOFT X iscrete it Flags SP L L L R K K K V The constant value K specifies the base number () and the base slot number (). The constant value K specifies the number of bytes to be read. The constant value K specifies the starting address in the intelligent module. V is the starting location in the PU where the specified data will be stored. V V V V X X X X V X X X X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR L NST L NST L NST R ORN escription PU aaa See memory map On when RX, WX R, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters. } PREV PREV PREV Intelligent Module { G E ata ddress ddress ddress ddress ddress ddress L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

242 hapter : Standard RLL - Intelligent I/O Instructions S HPP Write to Intelligent Module (WT) The Write to Intelligent Module instruction writes a block of data (- bytes maximum) to an intelligent I/O module WT from a block of V-memory in the PU. The function V aaa parameters are loaded into the first and second level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional instructions. Listed below are the steps to program the Read from Intelligent module function. Step : Load the base number (-) into the first byte and the slot number (-) into the second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack. Step : Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator stack (maximum of bytes). Step : Load the intelligent module address which will receive the data into the accumulator. This parameter must be a HEX value. Step : Insert the WT instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) where the data will be written from in the PU. Helpful Hint: Use the L instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent and load it into the accumulator when the HEX format is required. NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag. In the following example, when X is on, the WT instruction will write six bytes of data to an intelligent module in base, slot starting at address in the intelligent module and copy the data from V-memory locations V-V. irect SOFT X L L L WT K K K V Operand ata Type V-memory V iscrete it Flags SP The constant value K specifies the base number () and the base slot number (). The constant value K specifies the number of bytes to be written. The constant value K specifies the starting address in the intelligent module. V is the starting location in the PU where the specified data will be written from. V X X X X V V V V X X X X V X X X X Handheld Programmer Keystrokes $ STR L NST L NST L NST W NN escription T MLR PU L Range aaa See memory map On when RX, WX R, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters. } PREV PREV PREV Intelligent Module { G E ata ddress ddress ddress ddress ddress ddress L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

243 hapter : Standard RLL - Network Instructions Network Instructions S HPP Read from Network (RX) The Read from Network instruction causes the master device on a network to read a block of data from a slave device on the same RX network. The function parameters are loaded into the accumulator aaa and the first and second level of the stack. Listed below are the program steps necessary to execute the Read from Network function. Step : Load the slave address ( ) into the low byte and F into the high byte of the accumulator (the next two instructions push this word down to the second layer of the stack). Step : Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the accumulator, - bytes are allowed, (the next instruction pushes this word onto the top of the stack). Step : Load the starting Master PU address into the accumulator. This is the memory location where the data read from the slave will be put. This parameter requires a HEX value. Step : Insert the RX instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (aaa) where the data will be read from in the slave. Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values, the L instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V ll (See page ) Pointer P ll V-memory. (See page ) Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays Stage S Timer T ounter T Special Relay SP Program Memory $ (K program mem.) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

244 hapter : Standard RLL - Network Instructions In the following example, when X is on and the port busy relay SP (see special relays) is not on, the RX instruction will access port operating as a master. Ten consecutive bytes of data (V V) will be read from a PU at station address and copied into V-memory locations V V in the PU with the master port. irectsoft irectsoft X SP HandheldProgrammer Keystrokes $ STR W NN L NST L NST L NST R ORN X SET L KF The constant value KF specifies the port number () and the slave address () L K The constant value K specifies the number of bytes to be read (- bytes allowed) L O Octal address is converted to HEX and loaded into the accumulator. V is the starting location for the Master PU where the specified data will be read into V V V V V V V X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X V V V V V V V RX V V is the starting location in the for the Slave PU where the specified data will be read from SP STRN K JMP K JMP G F Master PU Slave PU F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

245 hapter : Standard RLL - Network Instructions S HPP Write to Network (WX) The Write to Network instruction is used to write a block of data from the master device to a slave device on the same network. The function parameters are loaded WX into the accumulator and the first and second level of aaa the stack. Listed below are the program steps necessary to execute the Write to Network function. Step : Load the slave address ( ) into the low byte and F into the high byte of the accumulator (the next two instructions push this word down to the second layer of the stack). Step : Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the accumulator, - bytes are allowed, (the next instruction pushes this word onto the top of the stack). Step : Load the starting Master PU address into the accumulator. This is the memory location where the data will be written from. This parameter requires a HEX value. Step : Insert the WX instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (aaa) where the data will be written to in the slave. Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values, the L instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator. Operand ata Type L Range aaa V-memory V ll (See page ) Pointer P ll V-memory (See page ) Inputs X Outputs Y ontrol Relays Stage S Timer T ounter T Special Relay SP Program Memory $ (K program mem.) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

246 hapter : Standard RLL - Network Instructions In the following example when X is on and the module busy relay SP (see special relays) is not on, the WX instruction will access port operating as a master. Ten consecutive bytes of data is read from the Master PU and copied to V-memory locations V V in the slave PU at station address. irectsoft irectsoft X SP HandheldProgrammer Keystrokes $ STR W NN L NST L NST L NST W NN X SET L KF The constant value KF specifies the port number () and the slave address () WX V V is the starting location in the for the Slave PU where the specified data will be written to Master PU Slave PU L K V X X X X X X X X V The constant value K V V specifies the number of bytes to be written (- V V bytes allowed) L O V V V V V V V X X X X X X X X V Octal address is. converted to HEX and loaded into the accumulator V is the starting location for the Master PU where the specified data will be read from. SP STRN K JMP K JMP E F F L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

247 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) Instructions Intelligent ox (Iox) Instructions The Intelligent ox Instructions (commonly refered to as Iox Instructions) listed in this section are additional, and much different looking, instructions made available with the release of irectsoft. The L PL requires firmware version v. or later to use the new irectsoft features. For more information on irectsoft, please visit our website at: nalog Helper Ioxes Instruction Ibox # Page nalog Input / Output ombo Module Pointer Setup (NLGM) I- - nalog Input Module Pointer Setup (NLGIN) I- - nalog Output Module Pointer Setup (NLG) I- - nalog Scale it to (NSL) I- - nalog Scale it inary to inary (NSL) I- - Filter Over Time - (FILTER) I- - Filter Over Time - inary (FILTER) I- - Hi/Low larm - (HILOL) I- - Hi/Low larm - inary (HILOL) I- - iscrete Helper Ioxes Instruction Ibox # Page Off elay Timer (OFFTMR) I- - On elay Timer (ONTMR) I- - One Shot (ONESHOT) I- - Push On / Push Off ircuit (PONOFF) I- - Memory Ioxes Instruction Ibox # Page Move Single Word (MOVEW) I- - Move ouble Word (MOVE) I- - Math Ioxes Instruction Ibox # Page Math - (MTH) I- - Math - inary (MTHIN) I- - Square (SQURE) I- - Square inary (SQURE) I- - Sum Numbers (SUM) I- - Sum inary Numbers (SUMIN) I- - L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

248 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) Instructions ommunication Ioxes Instruction Ibox # Page EOM onfiguration (EOM) I- - EOM isable HP (EHP) I- - EOM Enable HP (EHPE) I- - EOM Query HP Setting (EHPQ) I- - EOM Send (EEMIL) I- - EOM Restore efault Setup (EEMRS) I- - EOM Setup (EEMSUP) I- - EOM IP Setup (EIPSUP) I- - EOM Read escription (ERES) I- - EOM Read Gateway ddress (ERGW) I- - EOM Read IP ddress (ERIP) I- - EOM Read Module I (ERMI) I- - EOM Read Module Name (ERNM) I- - EOM Read Subnet Mask (ERSNM) I- - EOM Write escription (EWRES) I- - EOM Write Gateway ddress (EWRGW) I- - EOM Write IP ddress (EWRIP) I- - EOM Write Module I (EWRMI) I- - EOM Write Name (EWRNM) I- - EOM Write Subnet Mask (EWRSNM) I- - EOM RX Network Read (ERX) I- - EOM WX Network Write(EWX) I- - NETFG Network onfiguration (NETFG) I- - Network RX Read (NETRX) I- - Network WX Write (NETWX) I- - ounter I/O Ioxes Instruction Ibox # Page TRIO onfiguration (TRIO) I- - TRIO dd Entry to End of Preset Table (TRPT) I- - TRIO lear Preset Table (TRLRT) I- - TRIO Edit Preset Table Entry (TREPT) I- - TRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload (TRERL) I- - TRIO Initialize Preset Table (TRINPT) I- - TRIO Initialize Preset Table (TRINTR) I- - TRIO Load Profile (TRLPR) I- - TRIO Read Error (TRRER) I- - TRIO Run to Limit Mode (TRRTLM) I- - TRIO Run to Position Mode (TRRTPM) I- - TRIO Velocity Mode (TRVELO) I- - TRIO Write File to ROM (TRWFTR) I- - L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

249 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper S HPP nalog Input/Output ombo Module Pointer Setup (NLGM) (I-) The nalog Input/Output ombo Module Pointer Setup instruction generates the logic to configure the pointer method for an analog input/output combination module on the first N/ PL scan following a Program to Run transition. The NLGM Iox instruction determines the data format and Pointer addresses based on the PU type, the ase# and the module Slot#. The Input ata ddress is the starting location in user V-memory where the analog input data values will be stored, one location for each input channel enabled. The Output ata ddress is the starting location in user V-memory where the analog output data values will be placed by ladder code or external device, one location for each output channel enabled. Since the Iox logic only executes on the first scan, the instruction cannot have any input logic. NLGM Parameters ase # (K-Local): must be for L PL Slot #: specifies the single PL option slot that is occupied by the module Number of Input hannels: specifies the number of analog input channels to scan Input ata Format (- -IN): specifies the analog input data format ( or inary) - the binary format may be used for displaying data on some OI panels Input ata ddress: specifies the starting V-memory location that will be used to store the analog input data Number of Output hannels: specifies the number of analog output channels that will be used Output ata Format (- -IN): specifies the format of the analog output data ( or inary) Output ata ddress: specifies the starting V-memory location that will be used to source the analog output data Parameter L Range ase # (K-Local) K K (local base only) Slot # K K Number of Input hannels K K- Input ata Format (- -IN) K : K; inary: K Input ata ddress V See L V-memory map - ata Words Number of Output hannels K K- Output ata Format (- -IN) K : K; inary: K Output ata ddress V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

250 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper NLGM Example In the following example, the NLGM instruction is used to setup the pointer method for an analog I/O combination module that is installed in option slot. Four input channels are enabled and the analog data will be written to V - V in format. Two output channels are enabled and the analog values will be read from V - V in format. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

251 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper S HPP nalog Input Module Pointer Setup (NLGIN) (I-) nalog Input Module Pointer Setup generates the logic to configure the pointer method for one analog input module on the first PL scan following a Program to Run transition. N/ This Iox determines the data format and Pointer addresses based on the PU type, the ase#, and the Slot#. The Input ata ddress is the starting location in user V-memory where the analog input data values will be stored, one location for each input channel enabled. Since this logic only executes on the first scan, this Iox cannot have any input logic. NLGIN Parameters ase # (K-Local): must be for L PL Slot #: specifies the single PL option slot that is occupied by the module Number of Input hannels: specifies the number of input channels to scan Input ata Format (- -IN): specifies the analog input data format ( or inary) - the binary format may be used for displaying data on some OI panels Input ata ddress: specifies the starting V-memory location that will be used to store the analog input data Parameter L Range ase # (K-Local) K K (local base only) Slot # K K Number of Input hannels K K- Input ata Format (- -IN) K : K; inary: K Input ata ddress V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

252 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper NLGIN Example In the following example, the NLGIN instruction is used to setup the pointer method for an analog input module that is installed in option slot. Eight input channels are enabled and the analog data will be written to V - V in format. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

253 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper S HPP nalog Output Module Pointer Setup (NLG) (I-) nalog Output Module Pointer Setup generates the logic to configure the pointer method for one analog output module on the first PL scan following a Program to Run transition. N/ This Iox determines the data format and Pointer addresses based on the PU type, the ase#, and the Slot#. The Output ata ddress is the starting location in user V-memory where the analog output data values will be placed by ladder code or external device, one location for each output channel enabled. Since this logic only executes on the first scan, this Iox cannot have any input logic. NLG Parameters ase # (K-Local): must be for L PL Slot #: specifies the single PL option slot that is occupied by the module Number of Output hannels: specifies the number of analog output channels that will be used Output ata Format (- -IN): specifies the format of the analog output data ( or inary) Output ata ddress: specifies the starting V-memory location that will be used to source the analog output data Parameter L Range ase # (K-Local) K K (local base only) Slot # K K Number of Output hannels K K- Output ata Format (- -IN) K : K; inary: K Output ata ddress V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

254 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper NLG Example In the following example, the NLG instruction is used to setup the pointer method for an analog output module that is installed in option slot. Two output channels are enabled and the analog data will be read from V - V in format. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

255 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper S HPP nalog Scale it to (NSL) (I-) nalog Scale it to scales a bit analog value (- ) into engineering units. You specify the engineering unit high value (when raw is ), and N/ the engineering low value (when raw is ), and the output V memory address you want the to place the scaled engineering unit value. The engineering units are generated as and can be the full range of to (see NSL - nalog Scale it inary to inary if your raw units are in inary format). Note that this Iox only works with unipolar unsigned raw values. It does NOT work with bipolar or sign plus magnitude raw values. NSL Parameters Raw (- ): specifies the V-memory location of the unipolar unsigned raw - unscaled value High Engineering: specifies the high engineering value when the raw input is Low Engineering: specifies the low engineering value when the raw input is Engineering (): specifies the V-memory location where the scaled engineering value will be placed Parameter L Range Raw (- ) V,P See L V-memory map - ata Words High Engineering K K- Low Engineering K K- Engineering () V,P See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

256 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper NSL Example In the following example, the NSL instruction is used to scale a raw value (- ) that is in V. The engineering scaling range is set - (low engineering value - high engineering value). The scaled value will be placed in V in format. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

257 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper S HPP nalog Scale it inary to inary (NSL) (I-) nalog Scale it inary to inary scales a bit binary analog value (- decimal) into binary (decimal) engineering units. You specify the engineering unit high value (when N/ raw is ), and the engineering low value (when raw is ), and the output V-memory address you want to place the scaled engineering unit value. The engineering units are generated as binary and can be the full range of to (see NSL - nalog Scale it to if your raw units are in format). Note that this Iox only works with unipolar unsigned raw values. It does NOT work with bipolar, sign plus magnitude, or signed 's complement raw values. NSL Parameters Raw ( bit binary): specifies the V-memory location of the unipolar unsigned raw decimal unscaled value ( bit binary = - decimal) High Engineering: specifies the high engineering value when the raw input is decimal Low Engineering: specifies the low engineering value when the raw input is decimal Engineering (binary): specifies the V-memory location where the scaled engineering decimal value will be placed Parameter L Range Raw ( bit binary) V,P See L V-memory map - ata Words High Engineering K K- Low Engineering K K- Engineering (binary) V,P See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

258 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper NSL Example In the following example, the NSL instruction is used to scale a raw value (- binary) that is in V. The engineering scaling range is set - (low engineering value - high engineering value). The scaled value will be placed in V in binary format. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

259 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper S HPP Filter Over Time - (FILTER) (I-) Filter Over Time will perform a first-order filter on the Raw ata on a defined time interval. The equation is: N/ New = Old + [(Raw - Old) / F] where, New: New Filtered Value Old: Old Filtered Value F: Filter ivisor onstant Raw: Raw ata The Filter ivisor onstant is an integer in the range K to K, such that if it equaled K then no filtering would be done. The rate at which the calculation is performed is specified by time in hundredths of a second (. seconds) as the Filter Freq Time parameter. Note that this Timer instruction is embedded in the Iox and must NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Power flow controls whether the calculation is enabled. If it is disabled, the Filter Value is not updated. On the first scan from Program to Run mode, the Filter Value is initialized to to give the calculation a consistent starting point. FILTER Parameters Filter Frequency Timer: specifies the Timer (T) number which is used by the Filter instruction Filter Frequency Time (.sec): specifies the rate at which the calculation is performed Raw ata (): specifies the V-memory location of the raw unfiltered value Filter ivisor (-): this constant used to control the filtering effect. larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. value of results with no filtering. Filtered Value (): specifies the V-memory location where the filtered value will be placed Parameter L Range Filter Frequency Timer T T- Filter Frequency Time (. sec) K K- Raw ata () V See L V-memory map - ata Words Filter ivisor (-) K K- Filtered Value () V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

260 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper FILTER Example In the following example, the Filter instruction is used to filter a value that is in V. Timer(T) is set to. sec, the rate at which the filter calculation will be performed. The filter constant is set to. larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. value of results with no filtering. The filtered value will be placed in V. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

261 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper S HPP Filter Over Time - inary (FILTER) (I-) Filter Over Time in inary (decimal) will perform a first-order filter on the Raw ata on a defined time interval. The equation is: N/ New = Old + [(Raw - Old) / F] where New: New Filtered Value Old: Old Filtered Value F: Filter ivisor onstant Raw: Raw ata The Filter ivisor onstant is an integer in the range K to K, such that if it equaled K then no filtering would be done. The rate at which the calculation is performed is specified by time in hundredths of a second (. seconds) as the Filter Freq Time parameter. Note that this Timer instruction is embedded in the Iox and must NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Power flow controls whether the calculation is enabled. If it is disabled, the Filter Value is not updated. On the first scan from Program to Run mode, the Filter Value is initialized to to give the calculation a consistent starting point. FILTER Parameters Filter Frequency Timer: specifies the Timer (T) number which is used by the Filter instruction Filter Frequency Time (.sec): specifies the rate at which the calculation is performed Raw ata (inary): specifies the V-memory location of the raw unfiltered binary (decimal) value Filter ivisor (-): this constant used to control the filtering effect. larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. value of results with no filtering. Filtered Value (inary): specifies the V-memory location where the filtered binary (decimal) value will be placed Parameter L Range Filter Frequency Timer T T- Filter Frequency Time (. sec) K K- Raw ata (inary) V See L V-memory map - ata Words Filter ivisor (-) K K- Filtered Value (inary) V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

262 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper FILTER Example In the following example, the FILTER instruction is used to filter a binary value that is in V. Timer(T) is set to. sec, the rate at which the filter calculation will be performed. The filter constant is set to. larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. value of results with no filtering. The filtered value will be placed in V. SP L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

263 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper S HPP Hi/Low larm - (HILOL) (I-) Hi/Low larm - monitors a value V-memory location and sets four possible alarm states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low whenever the Iox has power flow. You enter N/ the alarm thresholds as constant K values (K-K) and/or value V-memory locations. You must ensure that threshold limits are valid, that is HH >= H > L >= LL. Note that when the High-High or Low-Low alarm condition is true, that the High and Low alarms will also be set, respectively. This means you may use the same threshold limit and same alarm bit for the High- High and the High alarms in case you only need one "High" alarm. lso note that the boundary conditions are inclusive. That is, if the Low boundary is K, and the Low-Low boundary is K, and if the Monitoring Value equals, then the Low larm N the Low-Low alarm will both be ON. If there is no power flow to the Iox, then all alarm bits will be turned off regardless of the value of the Monitoring Value parameter. HILOL Parameters Monitoring Value (): specifies the V-memory location of the value to be monitored High-High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high-high alarm limit High-High larm: On when the high-high limit is reached High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high alarm limit High larm: On when the high limit is reached Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low alarm limit Low larm: On when the low limit is reached Low-Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low-low alarm limit Low-Low larm: On when the low-low limit is reached Parameter Monitoring Value () V High-High Limit V, K High-High larm X, Y,, GX,GY, High Limit V, K High larm X, Y,, GX,GY, Low Limit V, K Low larm X, Y,, GX,GY, Low-Low Limit V, K Low-Low larm X, Y,, GX,GY, L Range See L V-memory map - ata Words K-; or see L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map K-; or see L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map K-; or see L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map K-; or see L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

264 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper HILOL Example In the following example, the HILOL instruction is used to monitor a value that is in V. If the value in V meets/exceeds the high limit of K, will turn on. If the value continues to increase to meet/exceed the high-high limit, will turn on. oth bits would be on in this case. The high and high-high limits and alarms can be set to the same value if one high limit or alarm is desired to be used. If the value in V meets or falls below the low limit of K, will turn on. If the value continues to decrease to meet or fall below the low-low limit of K, will turn on. oth bits would be on in this case. The low and low-low limits and alarms can be set to the same value if one low limit or alarm is desired to be used. SP L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

265 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper S HPP Hi/Low larm - inary (HILOL) (I-) Hi/Low larm - inary monitors a binary (decimal) V-memory location and sets four possible alarm states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low whenever the Iox has power N/ flow. You enter the alarm thresholds as constant K decimal values (K-K) and/or binary (decimal) V-memory locations. You must ensure that threshold limits are valid, that is HH >= H > L >= LL. Note that when the High-High or Low-Low alarm condition is true, that the High and Low alarms will also be set, respectively. This means you may use the same threshold limit and same alarm bit for the High- High and the High alarms in case you only need one "High" alarm. lso note that the boundary conditions are inclusive. That is, if the Low boundary is K, and the Low-Low boundary is K, and if the Monitoring Value equals, then the Low larm N the Low-Low alarm will both be ON. If there is no power flow to the Iox, then all alarm bits will be turned off regardless of the value of the Monitoring Value parameter. HILOL Parameters Monitoring Value (inary): specifies the V-memory location of the inary value to be monitored High-High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high-high alarm limit High-High larm: On when the high-high limit is reached High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high alarm limit High larm: On when the high limit is reached Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low alarm limit Low larm: On when the low limit is reached Low-Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low-low alarm limit Low-Low larm: On when the low-low limit is reached Parameter Monitoring Value (inary) V High-High Limit V, K High-High larm X, Y,, GX,GY, High Limit V, K High larm X, Y,, GX,GY, Low Limit V, K Low larm X, Y,, GX,GY, Low-Low Limit V, K Low-Low larm X, Y,, GX,GY, L Range See L V-memory map - ata Words K-; or see L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map K-; or see L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map K-; or see L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map K-; or see L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

266 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - nalog Helper HILOL Example In the following example, the HILOL instruction is used to monitor a binary value that is in V. If the value in V meets/exceeds the high limit of the binary value in V, will turn on. If the value continues to increase to meet/exceed the high-high limit value in V, will turn on. oth bits would be on in this case. The high and high-high limits and alarms can be set to the same V-memory location/value if one high limit or alarm is desired to be used. If the value in V meets or falls below the low limit of the binary value in V, will turn on. If the value continues to decrease to meet or fall below the low-low limit in V, will turn on. oth bits would be on in this case. The low and low-low limits and alarms can be set to the same V-memory location/value if one low limit or alarm is desired to be used. SP L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

267 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - iscrete Helper S HPP Off elay Timer (OFFTMR) (I-) Off elay Timer will delay the "turning off" of the Output parameter by the specified Off elay Time (in hundredths of a second) based on the power flow into the Iox. Once the N/ Iox receives power, the Output bit will turn on immediately. When the power flow to the Iox turns off, the Output bit WILL REMIN ON for the specified amount of time (in hundredths of a second). Once the Off elay Time has expired, the output will turn Off. If the power flow to the Iox comes back on EFORE the Off elay Time, then the timer is RESET and the Output will remain On - so you must continuously have NO power flow to the Iox for T LEST the specified Off elay Time before the Output will turn Off. This Iox utilizes a Timer resource (TMRF), which cannot be used anywhere else in your program. OFFTMR Parameters Timer Number: specifies the Timer(TMRF) number which is used by the OFFTMR instruction Off elay Time (.sec): specifies how long the Output will remain on once power flow to the Ibox is removed Output: specifies the output that will be delayed turning off by the Off elay Time. Parameter L Range Timer Number T T- Off elay Time K,V K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Output X, Y,, GX,GY, See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

268 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - iscrete Helper OFFTMR Example In the following example, the OFFTMR instruction is used to delay the turning off of output. Timer (T) is set to seconds, the off-delay period. When turns on, turns on and will remain on while is on. When turns off, will remain for the specified Off elay Time (s), and then turn off. Example timing diagram sec sec L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

269 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - iscrete Helper S HPP On elay Timer (ONTMR) (I-) On elay Timer will delay the "turning on" of the Output parameter by the specified amount of time (in hundredths of a second) based on the power flow into the Iox. Once the Iox loses power, the Output is turned off immediately. If the power flow turns off EFORE the On elay Time, then the timer is RESET and the Output is never turned on, so you N/ must have continuous power flow to the Iox for at least the specified On elay Time before the Output turns On. This Iox utilizes a Timer resource (TMRF), which cannot be used anywhere else in your program. ONTMR Parameters Timer Number: specifies the Timer(TMRF) number which is used by the ONTMR instruction On elay Time (.sec): specifies how long the Output will remain on once power flow to the Ibox is removed Output: specifies the output that will be delayed turning on by the On elay Time. Parameter L Range Timer Number T T- On elay Time K,V K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Output X, Y,, GX,GY, See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

270 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - iscrete Helper ONTMR Example In the following example, the ONTMR instruction is used to delay the turning on of output. Timer (T) is set to seconds, the on-delay period. When turns on, is delayed turning on by seconds. When turns off, turns off imediately. Example timing diagram sec sec L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

271 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - iscrete Helper S HPP One Shot (ONESHOT) (I-) One Shot will turn on the given bit output parameter for one scan on an OFF to ON transition of the power flow into the Iox. This Iox is simply a different name for the P oil (Positive ifferential). N/ ONESHOT Parameters iscrete Output: specifies the output that will be on for one scan Parameter iscrete Output X, Y, L Range See L V-memory map ONESHOT Example In the following example, the ONESHOT instruction is used to turn on for one PL scan after goes from an off to on transition. The input logic must produce an off to on transition to execute the One Shot instruction. Example timing diagram Scan time L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

272 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - iscrete Helper S HPP Push On / Push Off ircuit (PONOFF) (I-) Push On/Push Off ircuit toggles an output state whenever its input power flow transitions from off to on. Requires an extra bit parameter for scan-to-scan state information. This extra N/ bit must NOT be used anywhere else in the program. This is also known as a flip-flop circuit. PONOFF Parameters iscrete Input: specifies the input that will toggle the specified output iscrete Output: specifies the output that will be turned on/off or toggled Internal State: specifies a work bit that is used by the instruction Parameter iscrete Input.... X,Y,,S,T,T,GX,GY,SP,,P iscrete Output X,Y,,GX,GY, Internal State X, Y, L Range See L V-memory map See L V-memory map See L V-memory map PONOFF Example In the following example, the PONOFF instruction is used to control the on and off states of the output with a single input. When is pressed once, turns on. When is pressed again, turns off. is an internal bit used by the instruction. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

273 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - Memory S HPP Move Single Word (MOVEW) (I-) Move Single Word moves (copies) a word to a memory location directly or indirectly via a pointer, either as a HEX constant, from a memory location, or indirectly through a pointer. N/ MOVEW Parameters From WOR: specifies the word that will be moved to another location To WOR: specifies the location where the From WOR will be move to Parameter From WOR V,P,K To WOR V,P L Range K-FFFF; See L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map - ata Words MOVEW Example In the following example, the MOVEW instruction is used to move -bits of data from V to V when turns on. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

274 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - Memory S HPP Move ouble Word (MOVE) (I-) Move ouble Word moves (copies) a double word to two consecutive memory locations directly or indirectly via a pointer, either as a double HEX constant, from a double memory location, or indirectly through a pointer to a double memory location. N/ MOVE Parameters From WOR: specifies the double word that will be moved to another location To WOR: specifies the location where the From WOR will be move to Parameter From WOR V,P,K To WOR V,P L Range K-FFFFFFFF; See L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map - ata Words MOVE Example In the following example, the MOVE instruction is used to move -bits of data from V and V to V and V when turns on. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

275 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) Math S HPP Math - (MTH) (I-) Math - Format lets you enter complex mathematical expressions like you would in Visual asic, Excel, or ++ to do complex calculations, nesting N/ parentheses up to levels deep. In addition to + - * /, you can do Modulo (% aka Remainder), it-wise nd (&) Or ( ) Xor (^), and some functions - onvert to (), onvert to inary (IN), omplement (PL), onvert from Gray ode (GRY), Invert its (INV), and /HEX to Seven Segment isplay (SEG). Example: ((V + V) / (V - K)) * GRY(V & KF) Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single word formatted value. Intermediate results can go up to bit values, but as long as the final result fits in a bit word, the calculation is valid. Typical example of this is scaling using multiply then divide, (V * K) / K. The multiply term most likely will exceed but fits within bits. The divide operation will divide into the -bit accumulator, yielding a result that will always fit in bits. You can reference binary V-memory values by using the conversion function on a V-memory location but NOT an expression. That is (V) is okay and will convert V from inary to, but (V + V) will add V as, to V as, then interpret the result as inary and convert it to - NOT GOO. lso, the final result is a bit number and so you could do IN around the entire operation to store the result as inary. MTH Parameters WOR Result: specifies the location where the result of the mathematical expression will be placed (result must fit into bit single V-memory location) Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored in specified WOR Result. Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in format. Parameter WOR Result V Expression L Range See L V-memory map - ata Words Text L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

276 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - Math MTH Example In the following example, the MTH instruction is used to calculate the math expression which multiplies the value in V by then divides by and loads the resulting value in V. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

277 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - Math S HPP Math - inary (MTHIN) (I-) Math - inary Format lets you enter complex mathematical expressions like you would in Visual asic, N/ Excel, or ++ to do complex calculations, nesting parentheses up to levels deep. In addition to + - * /, you can do Modulo (% aka Remainder), Shift Right (>>) and Shift Left (<<), it-wise nd (&) Or ( ) Xor (^), and some binary functions - onvert to (), onvert to inary (IN), ecode its (EO), Encode its (ENO), Invert its (INV), HEX to Seven Segment isplay (SEG), and Sum its (SUM). Example: ((V + V) / (V - K)) * SUM(V & KF) Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single word binary formatted value. Intermediate results can go up to bit values, but as long as the final result fits in a bit binary word, the calculation is valid. Typical example of this is scaling using multiply then divide, (V * K) / K. The multiply term most likely will exceed but fits within bits. The divide operation will divide into the -bit accumulator, yielding a result that will always fit in bits. You can reference V-memory values by using the IN conversion function on a V-memory location but NOT an expression. That is, IN(V) is okay and will convert V from to inary, but IN(V + V) will add V as inary, to V as inary, then interpret the result as and convert it to inary - NOT GOO. lso, the final result is a bit binary number and so you could do around the entire operation to store the result as. MTHIN Parameters WOR Result: specifies the location where the binary result of the mathematical expression will be placed (result must fit into bit single V-memory location) Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored in specified WOR Result. Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in binary format. Parameter WOR Result V Expression L Range See L V-memory map - ata Words Text L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

278 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - Math MTHIN Example In the following example, the MTHIN instruction is used to calculate the math expression which multiplies the inary value in V by then divides by and loads the resulting value in V. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

279 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - Math S HPP Square (SQURE) (I-) Square squares the given -digit WOR number and writes it in as an -digit WOR result. N/ SQURE Parameters Value (WOR ): specifies the Word or constant that will be squared Result (WOR ): specifies the location where the squared WOR value will be placed Parameter Value (WOR ) V,P,K Result (WOR ) V L Range K- ; See L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map - ata Words SQURE Example In the following example, the SQURE instruction is used to square the -digit value in V and store the -digit double word result in V and V L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

280 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - Math S HPP Square inary (SQURE) (I-) Square inary squares the given -bit WOR inary number and writes it as a -bit WOR inary result. N/ SQURE Parameters Value (WOR inary): specifies the binary Word or constant that will be squared Result (WOR inary): specifies the location where the squared WOR binary value will be placed Parameter Value (WOR inary) V,P,K Result (WOR inary) V L Range K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map - ata Words SQURE Example In the following example, the SQURE instruction is used to square the single word inary value in V and store the -digit double word inary result in V and V. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

281 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - Math S HPP Sum Numbers (SUM) (I-) Sum Numbers sums up a list of consecutive -digit WOR numbers into an -digit WOR result. N/ You specify the group's starting and ending V- memory addresses (inclusive). When enabled, this instruction will add up all the numbers in the group (so you may want to place a differential contact driving the enable). SUM could be used as the first part of calculating an average. SUM Parameters Start ddress: specifies the starting address of a block of V-memory location values to be added together () End ddr (inclusive): specifies the ending address of a block of V-memory location values to be added together () Result (WOR ): specifies the location where the sum of the block of V-memory values will be placed Parameter Start ddress V End ddress (inclusive) V Result (WOR ) V L Range See L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map - ata Words SUM Example In the following example, the SUM instruction is used to total the sum of all values in words V thru V and store the resulting -digit double word value in V and V. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

282 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - Math S HPP Sum inary Numbers (SUMIN) (I-) Sum inary Numbers sums up a list of consecutive -bit WOR inary numbers into a -bit WOR binary result. N/ You specify the group's starting and ending V- memory addresses (inclusive). When enabled, this instruction will add up all the numbers in the group (so you may want to place a differential contact driving the enable). SUMIN could be used as the first part of calculating an average. SUMIN Parameters Start ddress: specifies the starting address of a block of V-memory location values to be added together (inary) End ddr (inclusive): specifies the ending address of a block of V-memory location values to be added together (inary) Result (WOR inary): specifies the location where the sum of the block of V-memory binary values will be placed Parameter Start ddress V End ddress (inclusive) V Result (WOR inary) V L Range See L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map - ata Words See L V-memory map - ata Words SUMIN Example In the following example, the SUMIN instruction is used to total the sum of all inary values in words V thru V and store the resulting -digit double word inary value in V and V. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

283 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM onfiguration (EOM) (I-) EOM onfiguration defines all the common information for one specific EOM module which is used by the other EOM Ioxes; for example, ERX - EOM N/ Network Read, EEMIL - EOM Send , EIPSUP - EOM IP Setup, etc. You MUST have the EOM onfiguration Iox at the top of your ladder/stage program with any other configuration Ioxes. The Message uffer parameter specifies the starting address of a WOR buffer. This is Octal addresses (e.g. V thru V). If you have more than one EOM in your PL, you must have a different EOM onfiguration Iox for EH EOM module in your system that utilizes any EOM Iox instructions. The Workspace and Status parameters and the entire Message uffer are internal, private registers used by the EOM onfiguration Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. In order for MOST EOM Ioxes to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. You can keep dip switch off if you are ONLY using EOM Network Read and Write Ioxes (ERX, EWX). EOM Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Slot: specifies the option slot the module occupies Status: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Msg uffer: specifies the starting address of a word buffer that will be used by the module for configuration Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Slot K K- Status V See L V-memory map - ata Words Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Msg uffer ( words used) V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

284 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EOM Example The EOM onfig Iox coordinates all of the interaction with other EOM based Ioxes (Exxxx). You must have an EOM onfig Iox for each EOM module in your system. onfiguration Ioxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan. This Iox defines EOM# K to be in slot. ny EOM Ioxes that need to reference this specific module (such as EEMIL, ERX,...) would enter K for their EOM# parameter. The Status register is for reporting any completion or error information to other EOM Ioxes. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program. The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the EOM, along with proper sharing and interlocking with the other EOM Ioxes in the program. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program. The Message uffer of words ( bytes) is a common pool of memory that is used by other EOM Ioxes (such as EEMIL). This way, you can have a bunch of EEMIL Ioxes, but only need common buffer for generating and sending each . These V-memory registers must not be used anywhere else in your entire program. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

285 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM isable HP (EHP) (I-) EOM isable HP will setup the EOM to use its internal TP/IP settings on a leading edge transition to the Iox. To configure the EOM's TP/IP settings manually, N/ use the NetEdit utility, or you can do it programmatically from your PL program using the EOM IP Setup (EIPSUP), or the individual EOM Ioxes: EOM Write IP ddress (EWRIP), EOM Write Gateway ddress (EWRGW), and EOM Write Subnet Mask (EWRSNM). The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). The "isable HP" setting is stored in Flash-ROM in the EOM and the execution of this Iox will disable the EOM module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY REOMMENE that you only execute this Iox ONE, on second scan. Since it requires a LEING edge to execute, use a NORMLLY LOSE SP (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the Iox. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EHP Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

286 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EHP Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, disable HP in the EOM. HP is the same protocol used by Ps for using a HP Server to automatically assign the EOM's IP ddress, Gateway ddress, and Subnet Mask. Typically disabling HP is done by assigning a hardcoded IP ddress either in NetEdit or using one of the EOM IP Setup Ioxes, but this Iox allows you to disable HP in the EOM using your ladder program. The EHP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to disable HP will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the specific error code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

287 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Enable HP (EHPE) (I-) EOM Enable HP will tell the EOM to obtain its TP/IP setup from a HP Server on a leading edge transition to the Iox. N/ The Iox will be successful once the EOM has received its TP/IP settings from the HP server. Since it is possible for the HP server to be unavailable, a Timeout parameter is provided so the Iox can complete, but with an Error (Error ode = decimal). See also the EOM IP Setup (EIPSUP) Iox to directly setup LL of the TP/IP parameters in a single instruction - IP ddress, Subnet Mask, and Gateway ddress. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). The "Enable HP" setting is stored in Flash-ROM in the EOM and the execution of this Iox will disable the EOM module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY REOMMENE that you only execute this Iox ONE, on second scan. Since it requires a LEING edge to execute, use a NORMLLY LOSE SP (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the Iox. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EHPE Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Timeout(sec): specifies a timeout period so that the instruction may have time to complete Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Timeout (sec) K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

288 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EHPE Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, enable HP in the EOM. HP is the same protocol used by Ps for using a HP Server to automatically assign the EOM's IP ddress, Gateway ddress, and Subnet Mask. Typically this is done using NetEdit, but this Iox allows you to enable HP in the EOM using your ladder program. The EHPE is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The commands to enable HP will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. The EHPE does more than just set the bit to enable HP in the EOM, but it then polls the EOM once every second to see if the EOM has found a HP server and has a valid IP ddress. Therefore, a timeout parameter is needed in case the EOM cannot find a HP server. If a timeout does occur, the Error bit will turn on and the error code will be decimal. The Success bit will turn on only if the EOM finds a HP Server and is assigned a valid IP ddress. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the specific error code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

289 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Query HP Setting (EHPQ) (I-) EOM Query HP Setting will determine if HP is enabled in the EOM on a leading edge transition to the Iox. The HP Enabled bit parameter will be ON if HP N/ is enabled, OFF if disabled. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EHPQ Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed HP Enabled: specifies a bit that will turn on if the EOM s HP is enabled or remain off if disabled - after instruction query, be sure to check the state of the Success/Error bit state along with HP Enabled bit state to confirm a successful module query Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map HP Enabled X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

290 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EHPQ Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, read whether HP is enabled or disabled in the EOM and store it in. HP is the same protocol used by Ps for using a HP Server to automatically assign the EOM's IP ddress, Gateway ddress, and Subnet Mask. The EHPQ is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to read (Query) whether HP is enabled or not will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

291 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Send (EEMIL) (I-) EOM Send , on a leading edge transition, will behave as an client and send an SMTP request to your SMTP Server to send the message to the addresses in N/ the To: field and also to those listed in the c: list hard coded in the EOM. It will send the SMTP request based on the specified EOM#, which corresponds to a specific unique EOM onfiguration (EOM) at the top of your program. The ody: field supports what the PRINT and VPRINT instructions support for text and embedded variables, allowing you to embed real-time data in your (e.g. "V = " V:). The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the request is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), an SMPT protocol error (between and ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). Since the EOM is only an lient and requires access to an SMTP Server, you MUST have the SMTP parameters configured properly in the EOM via the EOM's Home Page and/or the Setup instruction (EEMSUP). To get to the EOM's Home Page, use your favorite Internet browser and browse to the EOM's IP ddress, e.g. You are limited to approximately characters of message data for the entire instruction, including the To: Subject: and ody: fields. To save space, the EOM supports a hard coded list of addresses for the arbon opy field (cc:) so that you can configure those IN the EOM, and keep the To: field small (or even empty), to leave more room for the Subject: and ody: fields. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EEMIL Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written To: specifies an address that the message will be sent to Subject: subject of the message ody: supports what the PRINT and VPRINT instructions support for text and embedded variables, allowing you to embed real-time data in the message L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

292 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map To: Text Subject: Text ody: See PRINT and VPRINT instructions EEMIL Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. (example continued on next page) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

293 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EEMIL Example (cont d) Rung : When a machine goes down, send an to Joe in maintenance and to the VP over production showing what machine is down along with the date/time stamp of when it went down. The EEMIL is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). n will be sent whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. This helps prevent self inflicted spamming. If the is sent, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the SMTP error code or other possible error codes. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

294 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Restore efault Setup (EEMRS) (I-) EOM Restore efault Setup, on a leading edge transition, will restore the original Setup data stored in the EOM back to the working copy based on the N/ specified EOM#, which corresponds to a specific unique EOM onfiguration (EOM) at the top of your program. When the EOM is first powered up, it copies the setup data stored in ROM to the working copy in RM. You can then modify this working copy from your program using the EOM Setup (EEMSUP) Iox. fter modifying the working copy, you can later restore the original setup data via your program by using this Iox. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EEMRS Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

295 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EEMRS Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : Whenever an EStop is pushed, ensure that president of the company gets copies of all s being sent. The EOM Setup Iox allows you to set/change the SMTP settings stored in the EOM. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

296 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EEMRS Example Rung : Once the EStop is pulled out, take the president off the cc: list by restoring the default setup in the EOM. The EEMRS is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The ROM based configuration stored in the EOM will be copied over the "working copy" whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON (the working copy can be changed by using the EEMSUP Iox). If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the specific error code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

297 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Setup (EEMSUP) (I-) EOM Setup, on a leading edge transition, will modify the working copy of the setup currently in the EOM based on the specified EOM#, which N/ corresponds to a specific unique EOM onfiguration (EOM) at the top of your program. You may pick and choose any or all fields to be modified using this instruction. Note that these changes are cumulative: if you execute multiple EOM Setup Ioxes, then all of the changes are made in the order they are executed. lso note that you can restore the original EOM Setup that is stored in the EOM to the working copy by using the EOM Restore efault Setup (EEMRS) Iox. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). You are limited to approximately characters/bytes of setup data for the entire instruction. So if needed, you could divide the entire setup across multiple EEMSUP Ioxes on a fieldby-field basis, for example do the arbon opy (cc:) field in one EEMSUP Iox and the remaining setup parameters in another. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EEMSUP Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written SMTP Server IP ddr: optional parameter that specifies the IP ddress of the SMTP Server on the EOM s network Sender Name: optional parameter that specifies the sender name that will appear in the From: field to those who receive the Sender optional parameter that specifies the sender address that will appear in the From: field to those who receive the L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

298 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EEMSUP Parameters Port Number: optional parameter that specifies the TP/IP Port Number to send SMTP requests; usually this does not to be configured (see your network administrator for information on this setting) Timeout (sec): optional parameter that specifies the number of seconds to wait for the SMTP Server to send the to all the recipients c: optional parameter that specifies a list of carbon copy addresses to send all s to Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

299 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EEMSUP Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

300 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EEMSUP Example Rung : Whenever an EStop is pushed, ensure that president of the company gets copies of all s being sent.the EOM Setup Iox allows you to set/change the SMTP settings stored in the EOM. The EEMSUP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). t power-up, the ROM based configuration stored in the EOM is copied to a RM based "working copy". You can change this working copy by using the EEMSUP Iox. To restore the original ROM based configuration, use the Restore efault Setup EEMRS Iox. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the specific error code. Rung : Once the EStop is pulled out, take the president off the cc: list by restoring the default setup in the EOM. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

301 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM IP Setup (EIPSUP) (I-) EOM IP Setup will configure the three TP/IP parameters in the EOM: IP ddress, Subnet Mask, and Gateway ddress, on a leading edge transition to the Iox. The N/ EOM is specified by the EOM#, which corresponds to a specific unique EOM onfiguration (EOM) Iox at the top of your program. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). This setup data is stored in Flash-ROM in the EOM and will disable the EOM module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY REOMMENE that you only execute this Iox ONE on second scan. Since it requires a LEING edge to execute, use a NORMLLY LOSE SP (NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the Iox. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EIPSUP Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written IP ddress: specifies the module s IP ddress Subnet Mask: specifies the Subnet Mask for the module to use Gateway ddress: specifies the Gateway ddress for the module to use Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words IP ddress IP ddress... to... Subnet Mask ddress IP ddress Mask... to... Gateway ddress IP ddress... to... L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

302 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EIPSUP Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module.v is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, configure all of the TP/IP parameters in the EOM: IP ddress:... Subnet Mask:... Gateway ddress:... The EIPSUP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to write the TP/IP configuration parameters will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the specific error code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

303 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Read escription (ERES) (I-) EOM Read escription will read the EOM's escription field up to the number of specified characters on a leading edge transition to the Iox. N/ The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. ERES Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed escription: specifies the starting buffer location where the EOM s Module Name will be placed Num har: specifies the number of characters (bytes) to read from the EOM s escription field Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map escription V See L V-memory map - ata Words Num hars K K- L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

304 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication ERES Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module.v is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, read the Module escription of the EOM and store it in V thru V ( characters). This text can be displayed by an HMI. The ERES is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to read the module description will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

305 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Read Gateway ddress (ERGW) (I-) EOM Read Gateway ddress will read the parts of the Gateway IP address and store N/ them in consecutive V-memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition to the Iox. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. ERGW Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Gateway IP ddr: specifies the starting address where the EOM s Gateway ddress will be placed in consecutive V-memory locations Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Gateway IP ddress ( Words) V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

306 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication ERGW Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, read the Gateway ddress of the EOM and store it in V thru V ( decimal numbers). The EOM's Gateway ddress could be displayed by an HMI. The ERGW is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to read the Gateway ddress will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

307 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Read IP ddress (ERIP) (I-) EOM Read IP ddress will read the parts of the IP address and store them in N/ consecutive V-memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition to the Iox. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. ERIP Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed IP ddress: specifies the starting address where the EOM s IP ddress will be placed in consecutive V-memory locations Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map IP ddress ( Words) V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

308 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication ERIP Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, read the IP ddress of the EOM and store it in V thru V ( decimal numbers). The EOM's IP ddress could be displayed by an HMI. The ERIP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to read the IP ddress will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

309 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Read Module I (ERMI) (I-) EOM Read Module I will read the binary (decimal) WOR sized Module I on a N/ leading edge transition to the Iox. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. ERMI Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Module I: specifies the location where the EOM s Module I (decimal) will be placed Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Module I V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

310 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication ERMI Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module.v is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, read the Module I of the EOM and store it in V. The ERMI is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to read the module I will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

311 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Read Module Name (ERNM) (I-) EOM Read Name will read the Module Name up to the number of specified characters N/ on a leading edge transition to the Iox. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. ERNM Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Module Name: specifies the starting buffer location where the EOM s Module Name will be placed Num hars: specifies the number of characters (bytes) to read from the EOM s Name field Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Module Name V See L V-memory map - ata Words Num hars K K- L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

312 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication ERNM Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, read the Module Name of the EOM and store it in V thru V ( characters). This text can be displayed by an HMI. The ERNM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to read the module name will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

313 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Read Subnet Mask (ERSNM) (I-) EOM Read Subnet Mask will read the parts of the Subnet Mask and store them in N/ consecutive V-memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition to the Iox. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. ERSNM Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Subnet Mask: specifies the starting address where the EOM s Subnet Mask will be placed in consecutive V-memory locations Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Subnet Mask ( Words) V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

314 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication ERSNM Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, read the Subnet Mask of the EOM and store it in V thru V ( decimal numbers). The EOM's Subnet Mask could be displayed by an HMI. The ERSNM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to read the Subnet Mask will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

315 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Write escription (EWRES) (I-) EOM Write escription will write the given escription to the EOM module on N/ a leading edge transition to the Iox. If you use a dollar sign ($) or double quote ("), use the PRINT/VPRINT escape sequence of TWO dollar signs ($$) for a single dollar sign or dollar signdouble quote ($") for a double quote character. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). The escription is stored in Flash-ROM in the EOM and the execution of this Iox will disable the EOM module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY REOMMENE that you only execute this Iox ONE on second scan. Since it requires a LEING edge to execute, use a NORMLLY LOSE SP (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the Iox. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EWRES Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written escription: specifies the escription that will be written to the module Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words escription Text L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

316 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EWRES Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, set the Module escription of the EOM. Typically this is done using NetEdit, but this Iox allows you to configure the module description in the EOM using your ladder program. The EWRES is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to write the module description will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the specific error code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

317 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Write Gateway ddress (EWRGW) (I-) EOM Write Gateway ddress will write the given Gateway IP ddress to the N/ EOM module on a leading edge transition to the Iox. See also EOM IP Setup (EIPSUP) Iox to setup LL of the TP/IP parameters in a single instruction - IP ddress, Subnet Mask, and Gateway ddress. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). The Gateway ddress is stored in Flash-ROM in the EOM and the execution of this Iox will disable the EOM module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash- ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY REOMMENE that you only execute this Iox ONE, on second scan. Since it requires a LEING edge to execute, use a NORMLLY LOSE SP (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the Iox. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EWRGW Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written Gateway ddress: specifies the Gateway IP ddress that will be written to the module Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words Gateway ddress to... L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

318 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EWRGW Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, assign the Gateway ddress of the EOM to... The EWRGW is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to write the Gateway ddress will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the specific error code. To configure all of the EOM TP/IP parameters in one Iox, see the EOM IP Setup (EIPSUP) Iox. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

319 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Write IP ddress (EWRIP) (I-) EOM Write IP ddress will write the given IP ddress to the EOM module on a N/ leading edge transition to the Iox. See also EOM IP Setup (EIPSUP) Iox to setup LL of the TP/IP parameters in a single instruction - IP ddress, Subnet Mask, and Gateway ddress. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). The IP ddress is stored in Flash-ROM in the EOM and the execution of this Iox will disable the EOM module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY REOMMENE that you only execute this Iox ONE on second scan. Since it requires a LEING edge to execute, use a NORMLLY LOSE SP (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the Iox. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EWRIP Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written IP ddress: specifies the IP ddress that will be written to the module Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words IP ddress to... L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

320 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EWRIP Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, assign the IP ddress of the EOM to... The EWRIP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to write the IP ddress will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the specific error code. To configure all of the EOM TP/IP parameters in one Iox, see the EOM IP Setup (EIPSUP) Iox. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

321 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Write Module I (EWRMI) (I-) EOM Write Module I will write the given Module I on a leading edge transition to N/ the Iox If the Module I is set in the hardware using the dipswitches, this Iox will fail and return error code (decimal). The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). The Module I is stored in Flash-ROM in the EOM and the execution of this Iox will disable the EOM module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY REOMMENE that you only execute this Iox ONE on second scan. Since it requires a LEING edge to execute, use a NORMLLY LOSE SP (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the Iox. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EWRMI Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written Module I: specifies the Module I that will be written to the module Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words Module I K- L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

322 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EWRMI Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, set the Module I of the EOM. Typically this is done using NetEdit, but this Iox allows you to configure the module I of the EOM using your ladder program. The EWRMI is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to write the module I will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the specific error code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

323 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Write Name (EWRNM) (I-) EOM Write Name will write the given Name to the EOM module on a leading N/ edge transition to the Iox. If you use a dollar sign ($) or double quote ("), use the PRINT/VPRINT escape sequence of TWO dollar signs ($$) for a single dollar sign or dollar sign-double quote ($") for a double quote character. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). The Name is stored in Flash-ROM in the EOM and the execution of this Iox will disable the EOM module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY REOMMENE that you only execute this Iox ONE on second scan. Since it requires a LEING edge to execute, use a NORMLLY LOSE SP (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the Iox. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EWRNM Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written Module Name: specifies the Name that will be written to the module Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words Module Name Text L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

324 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EWRNM Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, set the Module Name of the EOM. Typically this is done using NetEdit, but this Iox allows you to configure the module name of the EOM using your ladder program. The EWRNM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to write the module name will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the specific error code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

325 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM Write Subnet Mask (EWRSNM) (I-) EOM Write Subnet Mask will write the given Subnet Mask to the EOM module N/ on a leading edge transition to the Iox. See also EOM IP Setup (EIPSUP) Iox to setup LL of the TP/IP parameters in a single instruction - IP ddress, Subnet Mask, and Gateway ddress. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is an error, the Error ode parameter will report an EOM error code (less than ), or a PL logic error (greater than ). The Subnet Mask is stored in Flash-ROM in the EOM and the execution of this Iox will disable the EOM module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY REOMMENE that you only execute this Iox ONE on second scan. Since it requires a LEING edge to execute, use a NORMLLY LOSE SP (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the Iox. In order for this EOM Iox to function, you must turn ON dip switch on the EOM circuit board. EWRSNM Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written Subnet Mask: specifies the Subnet Mask that will be written to the module Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words Subnet Mask Masked IP ddress L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

326 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EWRSNM Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. Rung : On the nd scan, assign the Subnet Mask of the EOM to... The EWRSNM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command to write the Subnet Mask will be sent to the EOM whenever the power flow into the Iox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on. If there is a failure, turn on. If it fails, you can look at V for the specific error code. To configure all of the EOM TP/IP parameters in one Iox, see the EOM IP Setup (EIPSUP) Iox. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

327 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM RX Network Read (ERX) (I-) EOM RX Network Read performs the RX instruction with built-in interlocking with N/ all other EOM RX (ERX) and EOM WX (EWX) Ioxes in your program to simplify communications networking. It will perform the RX on the specified EOM#'s network, which corresponds to a specific unique EOM onfiguration (EOM) Iox at the top of your program. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Whenever this Iox has power, it will read element data from the specified slave into the given destination V-memory buffer, giving other EOM RX and EOM WX Ioxes on that EOM# network a chance to execute. For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from different slaves, you can have all of these ERX and EWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP (lways On). They will execute round-robin style, automatically. ERX Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Slave I: specifies the slave EOM() PL that will be targeted by the ERX instruction From Slave Element (Src): specifies the slave address of the data to be read Number of ytes: specifies the number of bytes to read from the slave EOM() PL To Master Element (est): specifies the location where the slave data will be placed in the master EOM PL Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Slave I K K- From Slave Element (Src) X,Y,,S,T,T,GX,GY,V,P See L V-memory map Number of ytes K K- To Master Element (est) V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

328 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication ERX Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. (example continued on next page) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

329 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication ERX Example (cont d) Rung : Using EOM# K, read X-X from Slave K and write them to slave K as fast as possible. Store them in this local PL in -, and write them to - in slave K. oth the ERX and EWX work with the EOM onfig Iox to simplify all networking by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP "busy bits" or "error bits", or what slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other interlocks for resource management. In this example, SP (always ON) is driving both the ERX and EWX Ioxes in the same rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that same scan. s soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the program would get a turn. If there are no pending EOM Ioxes below the EWX, then the very next scan the ERX would start its request again. Using the ERX and EWX for all of your EOM network reads and writes is the fastest the PL can do networking. For local Serial Ports, M modules, or the original EOM modules, use the NETFG and NETRX/NETWX Ioxes. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

330 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP EOM WX Network Write(EWX) (I-) EOM WX Network Write performs the WX instruction with built-in interlocking with N/ all other EOM RX (ERX) and EOM WX (EWX) Ioxes in your program to simplify communications networking. It will perform the WX on the specified EOM#'s network, which corresponds to a specific unique EOM onfiguration (EOM) Iox at the top of your program. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Whenever this Iox has power, it will write data from the master's V-memory buffer to the specified slave starting with the given slave element, giving other EOM RX and EOM WX Ioxes on that EOM# network a chance to execute. For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from different slaves, you can have all of these ERX and EWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP (lways On). They will execute round-robin style, automatically. EWX Parameters EOM#: this is a logical number associated with this specific EOM module in the specified slot. ll other Exxxx Ioxes that need to reference this EOM module must reference this logical number Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Slave I: specifies the slave EOM() PL that will be targeted by the EWX instruction From Master Element (Src): specifies the location in the master EOM PL where the data will be sourced from Number of ytes: specifies the number of bytes to write to the slave EOM() PL To Slave Element (est): specifies the slave address the data will be written to Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Parameter L Range EOM# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Slave I K K- From Master Element (Src) V See L V-memory map - ata Words Number of ytes K K- To Slave Element (est) X,Y,,S,T,T,GX,GY,V,P See L V-memory map Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

331 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EWX Example Rung : The EOM onfig Iox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all EOM type Ioxes for one specific EOM module. Tag the EOM in slot as EOM# K. ll other Exxxx Ioxes refer to this module # as K. If you need to move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one Iox. V is used as a global result status register for the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. V-V is a common byte buffer available for use by the other Exxxx Ioxes using this specific EOM module. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

332 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication EWX Example Rung : Using EOM# K, read X-X from Slave K and write them to slave K as fast as possible. Store them in this local PL in -, and write them to - in slave K. oth the ERX and EWX work with the EOM onfig Iox to simplify all networking by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP "busy bits" or "error bits", or what slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other interlocks for resource management. In this example, SP (always ON) is driving both the ERX and EWX Ioxes in the same rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that same scan. s soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the program would get a turn. If there are no pending EOM Ioxes below the EWX, then the very next scan the ERX would start its request again. Using the ERX and EWX for all of your EOM network reads and writes is the fastest the PL can do networking. For local Serial Ports, M modules, or the original EOM modules, use the NETFG and NETRX/NETWX Ioxes. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

333 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP NETFG Network onfiguration (NETFG) (I-) Network onfig defines all the common information necessary for performing RX/WX N/ Networking using the NETRX and NETWX Iox instructions via a local PU serial port, M or EOM module. You must have the Network onfig instruction at the top of your ladder/stage program with any other configuration Ioxes. If you use more than one local serial port, M or EOM in your PL for RX/WX Networking, you must have a different Network onfig instruction for EH RX/WX network in your system that utilizes any NETRX/NETWX Iox instructions. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by the Network onfig Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. The nd parameter "PU Port or Slot" is the same value as in the high byte of the first L instruction if you were coding the RX or WX rung yourself. This value is PU and port specific (check your PL manual). Use KF for the L PU serial port. If using a M or EOM module, use K for slot. NETFG Parameters Network#: specifies a unique # for each EOM() or M network to use PU Port or Slot: specifies the PU port number or slot number of M/EOM() used Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Parameter L Range Network# K K- PU Port or Slot K K-FF Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

334 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication NETFG Example The Network onfiguration Iox coordinates all of the interaction with other Network Ioxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network onfiguration Iox for each serial port network, M module network, or original EOM module network in your system. onfiguration Ioxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan. This Iox defines Network# K to be for the local PU serial port # (KF). For local PU serial ports or M/EOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most significant byte of the first L instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or module. ny NETRX or NETWX Ioxes that need to reference this specific network would enter K for their Network# parameter. The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module, along with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX Ioxes in the program. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

335 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP Network RX Read (NETRX) (I-) Network RX Read performs the RX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other N/ Network RX (NETRX) and Network WX (NETWX) Ioxes in your program to simplify communications networking. It will perform the RX on the specified Network #, which corresponds to a specific unique Network onfiguration (NETFG) at the top of your program. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Whenever this Iox has power, it will read element data from the specified slave into the given destination V-memory buffer, giving other Network RX and Network WX Ioxes on that Network # a chance to execute. For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from different slaves, you can have all of these NETRX and NETWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP (lways On). They will execute round-robin style, automatically. NETRX Parameters Network#: specifies the (PU port s, M s, EOM s) Network # defined by the NETFG instruction Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Slave I: specifies the slave PL that will be targeted by the NETRX instruction From Slave Element (Src): specifies the slave address of the data to be read Number of ytes: specifies the number of bytes to read from the slave device To Master Element (est): specifies the location where the slave data will be placed in the master PL Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Parameter L Range Network# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Slave I K K- From Slave Element (Src) X,Y,,S,T,T,GX,GY,V,P See L V-memory map Number of ytes K K- To Master Element (est) V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

336 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication NETRX Example Rung : The Network onfiguration Iox coordinates all of the interaction with other Network Ioxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network onfiguration Iox for each serial port network, M module network, or original EOM module network in your system. onfiguration Ioxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan. This Iox defines Network# K to be for the local PU serial port # (KF). For local PU serial ports or M/EOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most significant byte of the first L instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or module. ny NETRX or NETWX Ioxes that need to reference this specific network would enter K for their Network# parameter. The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module, along with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX Ioxes in the program. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program. (example continued on next page) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

337 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication NETRX Example (cont d) Rung : Using Network# K, read X-X from Slave K and write them to slave K as fast as possible. Store them in this local PL in -, and write them to - in slave K. oth the NETRX and NETWX work with the Network onfig Iox to simplify all networking by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP "busy bits" or "error bits", or what port number or slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other interlocks for resource management. In this example, SP (always ON) is driving both the NETRX and NETWX Ioxes in the same rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that same scan. s soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the program would get a turn. If there are no pending NETRX or NETWX Ioxes below this Iox, then the very next scan the NETRX would start its request again. Using the NETRX and NETWX for all of your serial port, M, or original EOM network reads and writes is the fastest the PL can do networking. For EOM modules, use the EOM and ERX/EWX Ioxes. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

338 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication S HPP Network WX Write (NETWX) (I-) Network WX Write performs the WX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other N/ Network RX (NETRX) and Network WX (NETWX) Ioxes in your program to simplify communications networking. It will perform the WX on the specified Network #, which corresponds to a specific unique Network onfiguration (NETFG) at the top of your program. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Whenever this Iox has power, it will write data from the master's V-memory buffer to the specified slave starting with the given slave element, giving other Network RX and Network WX Ioxes on that Network # a chance to execute. For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from different slaves, you can have all of these NETRX and NETWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP (lways On). They will execute round-robin style, automatically. NETWX Parameters Network#: specifies the (PU port s, M s, EOM s) Network # defined by the NETFG instruction Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Slave I: specifies the slave PL that will be targeted by the NETWX instruction From Master Element (Src): specifies the location in the master PL where the data will be sourced from Number of ytes: specifies the number of bytes to write to the slave PL To Slave Element (est): specifies the slave address the data will be written to Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed Parameter L Range Network# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Slave I K K- From Master Element (Src) V See L V-memory map - ata Words Number of ytes K K- To Slave Element (est) X,Y,,S,T,T,GX,GY,V,P See L V-memory map Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

339 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication NETWX Example Rung : The Network onfiguration Iox coordinates all of the interaction with other Network Ioxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network onfiguration Iox for each serial port network, M module network, or original EOM module network in your system. onfiguration Ioxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan. This Iox defines Network# K to be for the local PU serial port # (KF). For local PU serial ports or M/EOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most significant byte of the first L instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or module. ny NETRX or NETWX Ioxes that need to reference this specific network would enter K for their Network# parameter. The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module, along with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX Ioxes in the program. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

340 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ommunication NETWX Example Rung : Using Network# K, read X-X from Slave K and write them to slave K as fast as possible. Store them in this local PL in -, and write them to - in slave K. oth the NETRX and NETWX work with the Network onfig Iox to simplify all networking by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP "busy bits" or "error bits", or what port number or slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other interlocks for resource management. In this example, SP (always ON) is driving both the NETRX and NETWX Ioxes in the same rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that same scan. s soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the program would get a turn. If there are no pending NETRX or NETWX Ioxes below this Iox, then the very next scan the NETRX would start its request again. Using the NETRX and NETWX for all of your serial port, M, or original EOM network reads and writes is the fastest the PL can do networking. For EOM modules, use the EOM and ERX/EWX Ioxes. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

341 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter S HPP TRIO onfiguration (TRIO) (I-) TRIO onfig defines all the common information for one specific TRIO module which N/ is used by the other TRIO Iox instructions (for example, TRLPR - TRIO Load Profile, TRERL - TRIO Edit and Reload Preset Table, TRRTLM - TRIO Run to Limit Mode,...). The Input/Output parameters for this instruction can be copied directly from the TRIO Workbench configuration for this TRIO module. Since the behavior is slightly different when the TRIO module is in an E ase via an ERM, you must specify whether the TRIO module is in a local base or in an E base. The L PL only supports local base operation at this time. You must have the TRIO onfig Iox at the top of your ladder/stage program along with any other configuration Ioxes. If you have more than one TRIO in your PL, you must have a different TRIO onfig Iox for EH TRIO module in your system that utilizes any TRIO Iox instructions. Each TRIO onfig Iox must have a UNIQUE TRIO# value. This is how the TRIO Ioxes differentiate between the different TRIO modules in your system. The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by the TRIO onfig Iox and MUST E UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. TRIO Parameters TRIO#: specifies a specific TRIO module based on a user defined number Slot: specifies the single PL option slot the TRIO module occupies Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction TRIO Location: specifies where the module is located (local base only for L) Input: This needs to be set to the same V-memory register as is specified in TRIO Workbench as Starting V address for inputs for this unique TRIO. Output: This needs to be set to the same V-memory register as is specified in TRIO Workbench as Starting V address for outputs for this unique TRIO. Parameter L Range TRIO# K K- Slot K K Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Input V See L V-memory map - ata Words Output V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

342 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRIO Example Rung : This sets up the TRIO card in slot of the local base. Each TRIO in the system will need a separate TRIO I-box before any TRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The TRIO has been configured to use V through V for its input data, and V through V for its output data. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

343 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter S HPP TRIO dd Entry to End of Preset Table (TRPT) (I-) TRIO dd Entry to End of Preset Table, on a leading edge transition to this Iox, will N/ append an entry to the end of a memory based Preset Table on a specific TRIO Output resource. This Iox will take more than PL scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error it is on, you can use the TRIO Read Error ode (TRRER) Iox to get extended error information. Entry Type: K: Set K: Reset K: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time) K: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time) K: Toggle K: Reset ount Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types. The Workspace register is for internal use by this Iox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. TRPT Parameters TRIO#: specifies a specific TRIO module based on a user defined number (see TRIO onfig) Output#: specifies a TRIO output to be used by the instruction Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to be added to the end of a Preset Table Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time for the Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types Preset ount: specifies an initial count value to begin at after Reset Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully Parameter L Range TRIO# K K- Output# K K- Entry Type V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Pulse Time V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Preset ount V,K K-; See L V-memory map Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

344 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRPT Example Rung : This sets up the TRIO card in slot of the local base. Each TRIO in the system will need a separate TRIO I-box before any TRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The TRIO has been configured to use V through V for its input data, and V through V for its output data. Rung : This rung is a sample method for enabling the TRPT command. -bit is used to allow the programmer to control the command from ata View for testing purposes. Turning on will cause the TRPT instruction to add a new preset to the preset table for output # on the TRIO in slot. The new preset will be a command to RESET (entry type K=reset), pulse time is left at zero as the reset type does not use this, and the count at which it will reset will be. Operating procedure for this example code is to load the TRPT_ex.cwb file to your TRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output # by turning on in dataview, turn encoder on TRIO to value above and output # light will come on and stay on for all counts past. Now reset the counter with, enable to execute TRPT command to add a reset for output # at a count of, turn on to enable output #, then turn encoder to value of + (output # should turn on) and then continue on to count of + (output # should turn off). (example continued on next page) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

345 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRPT Example (cont d) Rung : This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung : This rung allows the operator to enable output # from the ladder code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

346 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter S HPP TRIO lear Preset Table (TRLRT) (I-) TRIO lear Preset Table will clear the RM based Preset Table on a leading edge transition N/ to this Iox. This Iox will take more than PL scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error it is on, you can use the TRIO Read Error ode (TRRER) Iox to get extended error information. The Workspace register is for internal use by this Iox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. TRLRT Parameters TRIO#: specifies a specific TRIO module based on a user defined number (see TRIO onfig) Output#: specifies a TRIO output to be used by the instruction Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully Parameter L Range TRIO# K K- Output# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

347 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRLRT Example Rung : This sets up the TRIO card in slot of the local base. Each TRIO in the system will need a separate TRIO I-box before any TRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The TRIO has been configured to use V through V for its input data, and V through V for its output data. Rung : This rung is a sample method for enabling the TRLRT command. -bit is used to allow the programmer to control the command from ata View for testing purposes. Turning on will cause the TRLRT instruction to clear the preset table for output # on the TRIO in slot. Operating procedure for this example code is to load the TRLRT_ex.cwb file to your TRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output # by turning on in ata View, turn encoder on TRIO to value above and output # light will come on and stay on until a count of is reached, where it will turn off. Now reset the counter with, enable to execute TRLRT command to clear the preset table, turn on to enable output #, then turn encoder to value of + (output # should NOT turn on). L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

348 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRLRT Example Rung : This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung : This rung allows the operator to enable output # from the ladder code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

349 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter S HPP TRIO Edit Preset Table Entry (TREPT) (I-) TRIO Edit Preset Table Entry, on a leading edge transition to this Iox, will edit a single N/ entry in a Preset Table on a specific TRIO Output resource. This Iox is good if you are editing more than one entry in a file at a time. If you wish to do just one edit and then reload the table immediately, see the TRIO Edit and Reload Preset Table Entry (TRERL) Iox. This Iox will take more than PL scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error it is on, you can use the TRIO Read Error ode (TRRER) Iox to get extended error information. Entry Type: K: Set K: Reset K: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time) K: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time) K: Toggle K: Reset ount Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types. The Workspace register is for internal use by this Iox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. TREPT Parameters TRIO#: specifies a specific TRIO module based on a user defined number (see TRIO onfig Ibox) Output#: specifies a TRIO output to be used by the instruction Table#: specifies the Table number of which an Entry is to be edited Entry#: specifies the Entry location in the Preset Table to be edited Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during the edit Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time for the Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types Preset ount: specifies an initial count value to begin at after Reset Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

350 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter Parameter L Range TRIO# K K- Output# K K- Table# V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Entry# V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Entry Type V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Pulse Time V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Preset ount V,K K-; See L V-memory map Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map TREPT Example Rung : This sets up the TRIO card in slot of the local base. Each TRIO in the system will need a separate TRIO I-box before any TRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The TRIO has been configured to use V through V for its input data, and V through V for its output data. (example continued on next page) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

351 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TREPT Example (cont d) Rung : This rung is a sample method for enabling the TREPT command. -bit is used to allow the programmer to control the command from ata View for testing purposes. Turning on will cause the TREPT instruction to change the second preset from a reset at a count of to a reset at a count of for output # on the TRIO in slot. Operating procedure for this example code is to load the TREPT_ex.cwb file to your TRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output # by turning on in ata View, turn encoder on TRIO to value above and output # light will come on and stay on until a count of is reached, where it will turn off. Now reset the counter with, enable to execute TREPT command to change the second preset, turn on to enable output #, then turn encoder to value of + (output # should turn on) and then continue past a count of (output # should turn off). Note that we must also reload the profile after changing the preset(s), this is why the TRLPR command follows the TREPT command in this example. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

352 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TREPT Example Rung : This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung : This rung allows the operator to enable output # from the ladder code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

353 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter S HPP TRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload (TRERL) (I-) TRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload, on a leading edge transition to this Iox, will N/ perform this dual operation to a TRIO Output resource in one TRIO command. This Iox will take more than PL scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error it is on, you can use the TRIO Read Error ode (TRRER) Iox to get extended error information. Entry Type: K: Set K: Reset K: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time) K: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time) K: Toggle K: Reset ount Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types. The Workspace register is for internal use by this Iox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. TRERL Parameters TRIO#: specifies a specific TRIO module based on a user defined number (see TRIO onfig Ibox) Output#: specifies a TRIO output to be used by the instruction Table#: specifies the Table number of which an Entry is to be edited Entry#: specifies the Entry location in the Preset Table to be edited Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during the edit Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time for the Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types Preset ount: specifies an initial count value to begin at after Reset Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

354 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter Parameter L Range TRIO# K K- Output# K K- Table# V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Entry# V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Entry Type V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Pulse Time V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Preset ount V,K K-; See L V-memory map Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map TRERL Example Rung : This sets up the TRIO card in slot of the local base. Each TRIO in the system will need a separate TRIO I-box before any TRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The TRIO has been configured to use V through V for its input data, and V through V for its output data. (example continued on next page) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

355 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRERL Example (cont d) Rung : This rung is a sample method for enabling the TRERL command. -bit is used to allow the programmer to control the command from ata View for testing purposes. Turning on will cause the TRERL instruction to change the second preset in file from a reset at a value of to a reset at a value of. Operating procedure for this example code is to load the TRERL_ex.cwb file to your TRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output # by turning on in ata View, turn encoder on TRIO to value above and output # light will come on, continue to a count above and the output # light will turn off. Now reset the counter with, enable to execute TRERL command to change the second preset count value to, then turn encoder to value of + (output # should turn on) and continue on to a value of + and the output # light will turn off. Note that it is not necessary to reload this file seperately, however, the command can only change one value at a time. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

356 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRERL Example Rung : This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung : This rung allows the operator to enable output # from the ladder code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

357 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter S HPP TRIO Initialize Preset Table (TRINPT) (I-) TRIO Initialize Preset Table, on a leading edge transition to this Iox, will create a single N/ entry Preset Table in memory but not as a file, on a specific TRIO Output resource. This Iox will take more than PL scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error it is on, you can use the TRIO Read Error ode (TRRER) Iox to get extended error information. Entry Type: K: Set K: Reset K: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time) K: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time) K: Toggle K: Reset ount Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types. The Workspace register is for internal use by this Iox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. TRINPT Parameters TRIO#: specifies a specific TRIO module based on a user defined number (see TRIO onfig Ibox) Output#: specifies a TRIO output to be used by the instruction Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during the edit Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time for the Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types Preset ount: specifies an initial count value to begin at after Reset Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

358 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter Parameter L Range TRIO# K K- Output# K K- Entry Type V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Pulse Time V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Preset ount V,K K-; See L V-memory map Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map TRINPT Example Rung : This sets up the TRIO card in slot of the local base. Each TRIO in the system will need a separate TRIO I-box before any TRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The TRIO has been configured to use V through V for its input data, and V through V for its output data. (example continued on next page) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

359 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRINPT Example (cont d) Rung : This rung is a sample method for enabling the TRINPT command. -bit is used to allow the programmer to control the command from ata View for testing purposes. Turning on will cause the TRINPT instruction to create a single entry preset table, but not as a file, and use it for the output #. In this case the single preset will be a set at a count of for output #. Operating procedure for this example code is to load the TRINPT_ex.cwb file to your TRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output # by turning on in ata View, turn encoder on TRIO to value above and output # light will not come on. Now reset the counter with, enable to execute TRINPT command to create a single preset table with a preset to set output# at a count of, then turn encoder to value of + (output # should turn on). L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

360 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRINPT Example Rung : This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung : This rung allows the operator to enable output # from the ladder code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

361 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter S HPP TRIO Initialize Preset Table (TRINTR) (I-) TRIO Initialize Preset Table, on a leading edge transition to this Iox, will create a single N/ entry Preset Table in memory but not as a file, on a specific TRIO Output resource.this Iox will take more than PL scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error it is on, you can use the TRIO Read Error ode (TRRER) Iox to get extended error information. Entry Type: K: Set K: Reset K: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time) K: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time) K: Toggle K: Reset ount Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types. The Workspace register is for internal use by this Iox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. TRINTR Parameters TRIO#: specifies a specific TRIO module based on a user defined number (see TRIO onfig Ibox) Output#: specifies a TRIO output to be used by the instruction Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during the edit Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time for the Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types Preset ount: specifies an initial count value to begin at after Reset Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

362 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter Parameter L Range TRIO# K K- Output# K K- Entry Type V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Pulse Time V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Preset ount V,K K-; See L V-memory map Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map TRINTR Example Rung : This sets up the TRIO card in slot of the local base. Each TRIO in the system will need a separate TRIO I-box before any TRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The TRIO has been configured to use V through V for its input data, and V through V for its output data. (example continued on next page) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

363 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRINTR Example (cont d) Rung : This rung is a sample method for enabling the TRINTR command. -bit is used to allow the programmer to control the command from ata View for testing purposes. Turning on will cause the TRINTR instruction to create a single entry preset table, but not as a file, and use it for output #, the new preset will be loaded when the current count is reset. In this case the single preset will be a set at a count of for output #. Operating procedure for this example code is to load the TRINTR_ex.cwb file to your TRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output # by turning on in ata View, turn encoder on TRIO to value above and output # light will come on. Now turn on to execute the TRINTR command, reset the counter with, then turn encoder to value of + (output # should turn on). L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

364 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRINTR Example Rung : This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung : This rung allows the operator to enable output # from the ladder code. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

365 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter S HPP TRIO Load Profile (TRLPR) (I-) TRIO Load Profile loads a TRIO Profile File to a TRIO Output resource on a leading N/ edge transition to this Iox. This Iox will take more than PL scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error it is on, you can use the TRIO Read Error ode (TRRER) Iox to get extended error information. The Workspace register is for internal use by this Iox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. TRLPR Parameters TRIO#: specifies a specific TRIO module based on a user defined number (see TRIO onfig) Output#: specifies a TRIO output to be used by the instruction File#: specifies a TRIO profile File number to be loaded Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully Parameter L Range TRIO# K K- Output# K K- File# V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

366 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRLPR Example Rung : This sets up the TRIO card in slot of the local base. Each TRIO in the system will need a separate TRIO I-box before any TRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The TRIO has been configured to use V through V for its input data, and V through V for its output data. Rung : This TRIO Load Profile Iox will load File # into the working memory of Output in TRIO #. This example program requires that you load TRLPR_Iox.cwb into your Hx-TRIO module. Rung : If the file is successfully loaded, set Profile_Loaded. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

367 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter S HPP TRIO Read Error (TRRER) (I-) TRIO Read Error ode will get the decimal error code value from the TRIO module N/ (listed below) and place it into the given Error ode register, on a leading edge transition to the Iox Since the Error ode in the TRIO is only maintained until another TRIO command is given, you must use this instruction immediately after the TRIO Iox that reports an error via its Error bit parameter. The Workspace register is for internal use by this Iox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Error odes: : No Error : Specified command code is unknown or unsupported : File number not found in the file system : File type is incorrect for specified output function : Profile type is unknown : Specified input is not configured as a limit on this output : Specified limit input edge is out of range : Specified input function is unconfigured or invalid : Specified input function number is out of range : Specified preset function is invalid : Preset table is full : Specified Table entry is out of range : Specified register number is out of range : Specified register is an unconfigured input or output : Error reading Error ode - cannot access TRIO via ERM TRRER Parameters TRIO#: specifies a specific TRIO module based on a user defined number (see TRIO onfig) Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Error ode: specifies the location where the Error ode will be written Parameter L Range TRIO# K K- Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Error ode V See L V-memory map - ata Words L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

368 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRRER Example Rung : This sets up the TRIO card in slot of the local base. Each TRIO in the system will need a separate TRIO I-box before any TRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The TRIO has been configured to use V through V for its input data, and V through V for its output data. Rung : This TRIO Read Error ode Iox will read the Extended Error information from TRIO #. This example program requires that you load TRRER_Iox.cwb into your Hx-TRIO module. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

369 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter S HPP TRIO Run to Limit Mode (TRRTLM) (I-) TRIO Run To Limit Mode, on a leading edge transition to this Iox, loads the Run to N/ Limit command and given parameters on a specific Output resource. The TRIO's Input(s) must be configured as Limit(s) for this function to work. Valid Hexadecimal Limit Values: K - Rising Edge of h/ K - Falling Edge of h/ K - oth Edges of h/ K - Rising Edge of h/ K - Falling Edge of h/ K - oth Edges of h/ K - Rising Edge of h/ K - Falling Edge of h/ K - oth Edges of h/ K - Rising Edge of h/ K - Falling Edge of h/ K - oth Edges of h/ This Iox will take more than PL scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error it is on, you can use the TRIO Read Error ode (TRRER) Iox to get extended error information. The Workspace register is for internal use by this Iox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. TRRTLM Parameters TRIO#: specifies a specific TRIO module based on a user defined number (see TRIO onfig Ibox) Output#: specifies a TRIO output to be used by the instruction Frequency: specifies the output pulse rate (Hz - KHz) Limit: the TRIO's Input(s) must be configured as Limit(s) for this function to operate uty ycle: specifies the % of on time versus off time. This is a hex number. efault of is %, also entering will yield %. % duty cycle is defined as on half the time and off half the time Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

370 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter Parameter L Range TRIO# K K- Output# K K- Frequency V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Limit V,K K-FF; See L V-memory map - ata Words uty ycle V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map TRRTLM Example Rung : This sets up the TRIO card in slot of the local base. Each TRIO in the system will need a separate TRIO I-box before any TRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The TRIO has been configured to use V through V for its input data, and V through V for its output data. Rung : This TRIO Run To Limit Mode Iox sets up Output # in TRIO # to output pulses at a Frequency of Hz until Llimit # comes on. This example program requires that you load TRRTLM_Iox.cwb into your Hx-TRIO module. (example continued on next page) L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

371 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter TRRTLM Example (cont d) Rung : If the Run To Limit Mode parameters are OK, set the irection it and Enable the output. L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.

372 hapter : Intelligent ox (Iox) - ounter S HPP TRIO Run to Position Mode (TRRTPM) (I-) TRIO Run To Position Mode, on a leading edge transition to this Iox, loads the Run to Position command and given parameters on a specific Output resource. N/ Valid Function Values are: : Less Than h/fn : Greater Than h/fn : Less Than h/fn : Greater Than h/fn : Less Than h/fn : Greater Than h/fn : Less Than h/fn : Greater Than h/fn This Iox will take more than PL scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error it is on, you can use the TRIO Read Error ode (TRRER) Iox to get extended error information. The Workspace register is for internal use by this Iox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program. TRRTPM Parameters TRIO#: specifies a specific TRIO module based on a user defined number (see TRIO onfig Ibox) Output#: specifies a TRIO output to be used by the instruction Frequency: specifies the output pulse rate (Hz - KHz) uty ycle: specifies the % of on time versus off time. This is a hex number. efault of is %, also entering will yield %. % duty cycle is defined as on half the time and off half the time Position: specifies the count value, as measured on the encoder input, at which the output pulse train will be turned off Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully Parameter L Range TRIO# K K- Output# K K- Frequency V,K K-; See L V-memory map - ata Words uty ycle V,K K-; See L V-memory map Position V,K K-; See L V-memory map Workspace V See L V-memory map - ata Words Success X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map Error X,Y,,GX,GY, See L V-memory map L Micro PL User Manual, th Edition, Rev.